Avaya Business Communications Manager Release 6.0 Document Status: Standard Document Number: NN40050-105 Document Version: 04.02 Date: October 2010 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide © 2010 Avaya Inc. All Rights Reserved. Notices While reasonable efforts have been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the time of printing, Avaya assumes no liability for any errors. Avaya reserves the right to make changes and corrections to the information in this document without the obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes. Documentation disclaimer Avaya shall not be responsible for any modifications, additions, or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications, additions, or deletions were performed by Avaya. End User agree to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya, Avaya’s agents, servants and employees against all claims, lawsuits, demands and judgments arising out of, or in connection with, subsequent modifications, additions or deletions to this documentation, to the extent made by End User. Link disclaimer Avaya is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced within this site or documentation(s) provided by Avaya. Avaya is not responsible for the accuracy of any information, statement or content provided on these sites and does not necessarily endorse the products, services, or information described or offered within them. Avaya does not guarantee that these links will work all the time and has no control over the availability of the linked pages. Warranty Avaya provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition, Avaya’s standard warranty language, as well as information regarding support for this product, while under warranty, is available to Avaya customers and other parties through the Avaya Support Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support Please note that if you acquired the product from an authorized reseller, the warranty is provided to you by said reseller and not by Avaya. Licenses THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE, HTTP://SUPPORT.AVAYA.COM/ LICENSEINFO/ ARE APPLICABLE TO ANYONE WHO DOWNLOADS, USES AND/OR INSTALLS AVAYA SOFTWARE, PURCHASED FROM AVAYA INC., ANY AVAYA AFFILIATE, OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER (AS APPLICABLE) UNDER A COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT WITH AVAYA OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER. UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED TO BY AVAYA IN WRITING, AVAYA DOES NOT EXTEND THIS LICENSE IF THE SOFTWARE WAS OBTAINED FROM ANYONE OTHER THAN AVAYA, AN AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AVAYA AUTHORIZED RESELLER, AND AVAYA SOFTWARE WITHOUT A LICENSE. BY INSTALLING, DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE, OR AUTHORIZING OTHERS TO DO SO, YOU, ON BEHALF OF YOURSELF AND THE ENTITY FOR WHOM YOU ARE INSTALLING, DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE (HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO INTERCHANGEABLY AS "YOU" AND "END USER"), AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND CREATE A BINDING CONTRACT BETWEEN YOU AND AVAYA INC. OR THE APPLICABLE AVAYA AFFILIATE ("AVAYA"). Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise, no use should be made of the Documentation(s) and Product(s) provided by Avaya. All content in this documentation(s) and the product(s) provided by Avaya including the selection, arrangement and design of the content is owned either by Avaya or its licensors and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws including the sui generis rights relating to the protection of databases. You may not modify, copy, reproduce, republish, upload, post, transmit or distribute in any way any content, in whole or in part, including any code and software. Unauthorized reproduction, transmission, dissemination, storage, and or use without the express written consent of Avaya can be a criminal, as well as a civil offense under the applicable law. Third Party Components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements ("Third Party Components"), which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product ("Third Party Terms"). Information regarding distributed Linux OS source code (for those Products that have distributed the Linux OS source code), and identifying the copyright holders of the Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on the Avaya Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com/Copyright. Trademarks The trademarks, logos and service marks ("Marks") displayed in this site, the documentation(s) and product(s) provided by Avaya are the registered or unregistered Marks of Avaya, its affiliates, or other third parties. Users are not permitted to use such Marks without prior written consent from Avaya or such third party which may own the Mark. Nothing contained in this site, the documentation(s) and product(s) should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right in and to the Marks without the express written permission of Avaya or the applicable third party. Avaya is a registered trademark of Avaya Inc. All non-Avaya trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Downloading documents For the most current versions of documentation, see the Avaya Support. Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support Contact Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your product. The support telephone number is 1-800-242-2121 in the United States. For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya Web site: http:// www.avaya.com/support Contents 3 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide Contents Chapter 1 About the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Basic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Telephone Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Telephone Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Chapter 2 Entering and editing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Entering text using the telephone dialpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Entering text using the USB keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Chapter 3 Configuring options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 1. Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 1. Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2. Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3. Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2. Local Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1. IP Set&DHCP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2. Network Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3. Ethernet statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 4. IP networks statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 5. USB device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3. Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 4. Lock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Chapter 4 Telephone setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Language choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Ring Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Call log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Time offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 About your programmable buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Program memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Answering a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 While on an active call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Placing a call on hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 4 Contents NN40050-105 Using handsfree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Using a headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Muting the Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Accessing External Server Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 5 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide Chapter 1 About the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone The Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone brings voice and data to the desktop by connecting directly to a Local Area Network (LAN) through an Ethernet connection. Basic Features Your Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone supports the following: • six user-defined feature keys with labels and indicators • four soft keys • graphical, high-resolution LCD display, backlit, with adjustable contrast • high-quality speaker phone • volume control keys for adjusting ringer, speaker, handset, and headset volume • four specialized feature keys: — Directory — Message/Inbox — Shift/Outbox — Services • six call-processing fixed keys: — Mute — Handsfree — Goodbye — Expand to PC — Headset — Hold • gigabit Ethernet ports • built-in gigabit Ethernet switch for shared PC access • headset jack with an On/Off key Note: In this guide, user-defined feature key labels appear beside the keys, and soft key labels appear directly above the keys. Note: Some Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone phones are not configured to support soft key functionality. Consult your system administrator. 6 Chapter 1 About the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone NN40050-105 • USB port to support a keyboard or mouse • automatic network configuration • hearing-aid compatibility • wireless headset support using a Bluetooth® 1.2 compliant Audio Gateway (Headset Profile, Bluetooth Power Class 2) Note: Powered downstream 1.1-complaint USB hubs are supported, including USB 2.0 hubs, if they offer USB 1.1 backwards compliancy. Caution: Do not plug the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone into a regular telephone jack. This results in severe damage to the IP Deskphone. Consult your system administrator to ensure that you plug your telephone into a 10/100/1000BaseT Ethernet jack Caution: The Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone is designed for use in an indoor environment only. Chapter 1 About the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone 7 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide Figure 1 shows the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone. Figure 1 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone Telephone Controls Note: Some Avaya 1140E IP Deskphones are equipped with optional key caps. Text in parentheses indicates labels appearing on the key caps, for example, (Services). Soft keys are located below the display area. The LCD label above each key changes based on the active feature. This key has been programmed for call forwarding. Fwd 8 Chapter 1 About the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone NN40050-105 The Feature key is located on the bottom left of the display area and is used for accessing different phone options such as changing the ring type (Feature *6). The keys on either side of the display area are user-defined feature keys, with labels on the LCD display. A steady LCD light beside a line (DN) key indicates that the line is active. A flashing LCD light indicates the line is on hold or the feature is being programmed. A steady LCD light beside a feature key indicates that the feature is active. A flashing LCD light indicates that the feature is being programmed. Use the Volume control buttons to adjust the volume of the ringer, handset, headset, speaker, and the Handsfree feature. Press the top button to increase the volume, and press the bottom button to decrease volume. Press the Mute key to listen to the receiving party without transmitting. Press the Mute key again to return to two-way conversation. The Mute key applies to handsfree, handset, and headset microphones. Note: The Mute LED indicator, located on the Mute key, flashes to indicate that the microphone is muted. Press the Handsfree key to activate handsfree. Note: The Handsfree LED indicator, located on the Handsfree key, lights to indicate when handsfree is active. Feature GrpCl Z (Mute) (Handsfree) Chapter 1 About the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone 9 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide Use the Navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists appearing on the LCD display screen. The outer part of this key cluster rocks for up, down, left, and right movements. Use the Send/Enter key, at the center of the Navigation key cluster, to confirm menu selections. In most menus, you can use the Send/Enter key instead of the Select soft key. Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold. Tap the flashing line (DN) soft key to return to the caller on hold. Use the Expand to PC key to access external server applications. Press the Headset key to answer a call using the headset or to switch a call from the handset or handsfree to the headset. Note: The Headset LED indicator, located on the Handsfree key, lights to indicate that the headset is in use. Press the Headset key twice to open the Bluetooth Setup menu. Note: If Bluetooth wireless technology is not enabled on your phone, this menu is not available. Use the Goodbye key to terminate an active call. When a message is waiting, the red Visual Alerter/Message Waiting indicator flashes. Also, when the ringer sounds, this indicator flashes. (Hold) (Expand) (Headset) (Headset) (Headset) (Goodbye) 10 Chapter 1 About the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone NN40050-105 When your Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone firmware is being updated, the blue Feature Status Lamp indicator flashes. Note: To find out if additional features are supported, contact your administrator. Programmable memory button. (Default: Blank) Press the Services key to access the scrollable Feature Display menu (FEATURE *900), including the hot desking feature (programmable memory button). Double-press the Services key to access the Local Tools menu, and use the navigation keys to access the following items: • 1. Preferences • 2. Local Diagnostics • 3. Network Configuration • 4. Lock Menu Note: Your system administrator can establish a password for the Tools menu. If you attempt to access the Tools menu and a dialog box appears prompting you for a password, contact your system administrator. Programmable memory button. (Default: Blank) (Copy) (Services) (Services) (Services) (Stop) Chapter 1 About the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone 11 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide Telephone Display Your Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone has three display areas: • The upper display area provides labels for the four user-defined feature keys. • The middle display area contains single-line information for items such as caller number, caller name, feature prompt string, user-entered digits, date and time information, and telephone information. • The lower display area provides labels for the four soft keys. Press the Express messaging key (FEATURE 980; programmable memory button) to send voice mail messages. For more information about voice mail messaging, refer to your CallPilot Quick Reference Card. Note: The functionality of the "shift" feature is not supported by Avaya Business Communications Manager or by Survivable Remote Gateway (when in local mode). This feature is reserved for use exclusively for sets registered to Avaya Communications server 1000 platforms. Press the Mailbox in key (programmable memory button) to open your CallPilot mailbox. For more information about mailbox options, refer to your CallPilot Quick Reference Card. Programmable memory button. (Default: Blank) (Outbox) (Inbox) (Directory) 12 Chapter 1 About the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone NN40050-105 Figure 2 shows an idle LCD screen. Figure 2 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone LCD screen Upper display area User-defined feature key labels Middle display area Date/Time display Call party information Feature status informatio n Options information Directories information Lower display area Soft keys 13 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide Chapter 2 Entering and editing text You can enter and edit text on your Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone using the following methods. Which method you use for text entry or editing depends on the application. Table 1 shows the applications and input devices that you can use for text entry. Table 1 Application text entry Entering text using the telephone dialpad You can use the dialpad to enter text. For example, if you want to enter the letter A, press the number 2 key once. If you want to enter the letter C, press the number 2 key three times. Entering text using the USB keyboard You can use the USB keyboard, when connected, to enter text in the tools and graphical applications. For number entry in telephone applications (for example, when dialing), you can use the keyboard to enter digits (0–9), as well as asterisk (*) and number sign (#). Other characters are not used. When on a call, you can use the function keys (f1, f2, f3, f4, f5, f6, f7, and f8) to control the telephone. Table 2 shows the function keys and their associated action during telephone calls. Table 2 USB keyboard function keys during telephone calls For: Use: Call Server-related applications (for example, changing feature key labels or dialing) Dialpad USB keyboard for numeric entries only Graphical applications USB keyboard Local Tools menu USB keyboard Dialpad for numeric entries Note: No letters are associated with the number 1 or 0 keys. Function Key Action f1 Go to Handsfree mode f2 Go to Headset mode f3 Place the current call on hold f4 Mute the current call f5 Volume up 14 Chapter 2 Entering and editing text NN40050-105 f6 Volume down f7 Copy f8 Quit 15 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide Chapter 3 Configuring options Your Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone has both local and server-based options. Two methods are available to navigate in the Local Tools menu: • Follow the prompts on screen. • Where a menu entry has a number in front of it, you can select that entry by pressing the associated key on the dialpad. For example, when you are in the Local Tools menu, you can access 2. Local Diagnostics by pressing the 2 key on the dialpad. Double-press the (Services) key to open the Local Tools Menu and access the following options: 1. Preferences Use the Preferences menu item to configure local preferences. 1. Display Settings Use the Contrast tool to alter the physical settings of the display. Use the Sleep tool to control how long the display remains lit if the phone is inactive. 1 Double-press (Services) to open the Local Tools menu. 2 Press the 1 key on the telephone dialpad to open the 1. Preferences menu, and press the 1 key on the telephone dialpad to open the 1. Display Settings menu. 3 Press the Up/Down navigation keys to scroll and select either Contrast or Sleep. Press the Select soft key. 4 Press the Up/Down navigation keys to increase or decrease the value. 5 Press the Exit soft key. 2. Language Use the Language tool to select the language used on your phone. 1 Double-press (Services) to open the Local Tools menu. 2 Press the 1 key on the telephone dialpad to open the 1. Preferences menu, and press the 2 key on the telephone dialpad to open the 2. Language menu. Note: Many of the options discussed in this section are for administrator use only. Do not make any changes unless instructed by an administrator. 16 Chapter 3 Configuring options NN40050-105 3 Press the Up/Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight the desired language (for example, German [Deutsche]). 4 Choose one of the following: • Press the Select soft key to save the desired language and return to the Telephone Options menu. • Press the Cancel soft key to keep existing configurations. 5 Press the Exit soft key. Changes are saved automatically. 3. Bluetooth Setup Your Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone is equipped with a Bluetooth wireless technology radio system to support wireless headsets. You can access the Bluetooth Setup options using either of the following two methods: • Double-press the Headset key to open the Bluetooth Setup dialog box. This method is used in this document. • Double-press the Services key to open the Local Tools menu, press 1 on the dialpad to select 1. Preferences, and press 3 on the dialpad to open the 3. Bluetooth Setup dialog box. Contact your administrator to find out if Bluetooth wireless technology functionality is available for your use. To pair the wireless headset with your phone: 1 Check with your administrator to ensure that Bluetooth wireless technology is available for your use. 2 Double-press the (Headset) key access 3. Bluetooth setup. The Enable Bluetooth check box is highlighted. Note: The Bluetooth Setup menu entry is not available on all phones. If the Bluetooth Setup menu entry appears dimmed, or fails to open when you double press the Headset key, the feature is not enabled on your phone. Before you can use a wireless headset with your phone, the feature must be enabled by the system administrator. Note: If Bluetooth wireless technology is enabled on your phone, and password-protection for the Local Tools menu has been enabled, you can still double-press the Headset key to access the Bluetooth Setup menu. Note: If the Bluetooth Setup menu fails to open when you double press the Headset key, Bluetooth wireless technology is not enabled on your phone. Chapter 3 Configuring options 17 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide 3 Press the Enter key to activate Bluetooth wireless technology. A check mark is displayed to indicate that the feature is activated. The message “BT Enabled” appears at the bottom of the display. 4 Put your wireless headset in its pairing or search mode. The procedure for doing this can be different for each wireless headset. Refer to the documentation that accompanied your headset, or contact the vendor. For example, if you are using the GN Netcom GN 6210, do the following: a Turn the headset off by pressing and holding the telephone button for 3 - 4 seconds until a high to low tone is heard. The headset blue LED turns off. b Press and hold the telephone button for about 8 seconds until the blue LED flashes and then lights steadily. 5 Search for (pair) the headset: a Press the Right navigation key twice to highlight the Search button, displayed next to the Search Devices item. b Press the Enter key. The message “Searching....” is displayed. c If the search is successful, a list of Bluetooth wireless devices appears in the Found: combo box. d Choose one of the following: — If the search is successful, proceed to step 6. — If the search is not successful, the message "Search completed. No device found" is displayed. Power off the wireless headset, and repeat steps 4 and 5. 6 When your headset is displayed in the Found: combo box, press the Stop soft key or wait for the search to finish. 7 Choose one of the following: • If your headset is displayed in the Found: combo box, proceed to step 8. • If your headset is not displayed in the Found: combo box, select your headset from the list, as follows: a Press the Right navigation key to navigate to the Found: combo box. Press the Enter key to start the edit mode. b Press the Down navigation key to open the list. Press the Up/Down navigation keys to scroll and highlight your headset. c Press the Enter key to select the headset and close the list. Press the Enter key to exit edit mode. 18 Chapter 3 Configuring options NN40050-105 8 Press the Right navigation key to scroll in the list and highlight the Pair button (next to the Pair Device item) and press the Enter key. a A dialog box appears that prompts you to "Enter PIN#". b Use the telephone dialpad to enter the headset PIN and press the Enter key. 9 Choose one of the following: • If the headset is successfully paired with your phone, proceed to step 10. To verify that the pairing was successful, ensure that the headset appears in the list next to the Paired: item. If pairing is successful, the message "Pair completed" is also displayed at the bottom of the screen. • If the headset is not successfully paired with your phone, an error message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. If you get an error message: — Confirm that the wireless headset is still in search/pair mode. For example, on the GN Netcom GN 6210 headset the blue LED should still be lighted when the pairing operation starts. — If the headset timed out and exited search/pairing mode, put the headset in pairing mode, as discussed in step 4, and repeat step 8. — Check that you are using the correct PIN and repeat step 8. 10 Choose one of the following: • If your headset is displayed in the Paired: combo box, proceed to step 11. • If more than one device is paired, you may need to navigate to the one you want, as follows: a Press the Right navigation key to scroll in the list and highlight the Paired: combo box. Press the Enter key to start the edit mode. b Press the Up/Down navigation keys to open the list. Press the Up/Down navigations key to scroll in the list and highlight your headset. c Press the Enter key to select the headset and close the list. Press the Enter key to exit edit mode. 11 Choose one of the following: • If only one headset is paired, proceed to step 12. • If more than one Bluetooth wireless headset is paired, the first headset paired is automatically made the active device. To make a different headset active, do the following: — Press the Right navigation key to scroll in the list and highlight the Set button (next to the Set Active Device item). — Press the Enter soft key. The message "Set active: “device name”" is displayed. This means that the headset named is now the active wireless headset and is used when you press the headset key. Note: Check your headset's documentation to find its PIN (sometimes called a passkey). Typically this value is 0000. Chapter 3 Configuring options 19 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide 12 Press the Exit soft key to close the Bluetooth Setup menu and return to the main display. Changes are saved automatically. Dual Pairing Headsets Take special care when using a "dual pairing" type of Bluetooth wireless technology headset. The GN Netcom GN6210 is an example of such a headset. It can be paired to its base as well as to the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone. If it is paired to both, the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone is the second device, and the following applies: Press the headset "telephone" key: • If a single tone sounds, the headset is connected to the base. • If a double beep sounds, the headset is connected to the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone. If the base is powered off, the headset is only paired to the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone and pressing the "telephone" key connects you to the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone. Interaction with wired headsets If you connect a Bluetooth wireless technology headset and a wired headset to the same Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone, the two interact as follows: • If no wireless headset is paired, the wired headset works as normal. Likewise, if a wireless headset is paired with the set, but is not in range, the wired headset works as normal. • If the Use BT headset check box is selected, the wireless headset is used as the phone headset. — The Bluetooth wireless technology headset can work only if it is within range of the phone; as the wireless headset approaches the edge of its radio range, the audio quality degrades and radio interference noise increases. When the wireless headset is in connecting range, the Headset key controls the wireless headset, even if a wired headset is attached. If a wireless headset moves out of connecting range, a special beep sounds in the headset indicating the connection was lost. For example, on the GN6210, this is a series of tones, high to low, the same as the beeps that sound when a call ends. Note: Avaya recommends that you not pair more than one headset of the same model, because they have identical names in the Paired list. Note: Unless you need to dual pair the GN6210 headset, operating the headset with the Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone is simpler if it is only used with its charging-only base. The desktop telephone base should be powered off if it is not in use. 20 Chapter 3 Configuring options NN40050-105 When you do not want to use Bluetooth wireless technology If a wireless headset is connected, and you want to use the wired headset, you can switch between the two. It is not necessary to unpair or disable the Bluetooth wireless technology feature. To switch between a wired headset and wireless headset: 1 Double-press the (Headset) key to open the 3. Bluetooth Setup dialog box. 2 Press the Left/Right navigation key to select the Use BT Headset item. 3 Press the Enter key to toggle this option on or off. A check mark indicates that the wireless headset is used. Clear the check mark to use a wired headset. On (o) by default. To unpair a Bluetooth wireless technology headset: 1 Double-press the (Headset) key to open the 3. Bluetooth Setup dialog box. 2 Press the Right navigation key to select the Paired: item. 3 Choose one of the following: • If your headset is displayed in the Paired combo box, proceed to step 5. • If more than one device is paired, and your headset is not already displayed in the Paired combo box, do the following: a Press the Right navigation key to select the Paired: combo box. Press the Enter key to open edit mode. b Press the Up/Down navigation keys to open the list. Press the Up/Down navigations key to scroll in the list and highlight your headset. c Press the Enter key to select the headset and close the combo box. Press the Enter key to exit edit mode. 4 Press the Right navigation key to select the UnPair button (next to the UnPair Device item). 5 Press the Enter key. Your wireless headset is unpaired and removed from the Paired: item's list. Note: You can switch between a wired and wireless headset and back again either when the phone is idle or during an active call. Note: Your wireless headset is no longer paired with your phone, and the wired headset can be used. To use the wireless headset again, you must perform the pairing and activation procedure. Chapter 3 Configuring options 21 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide 2. Local Diagnostics 1. IP Set&DHCP Information The Network Configuration tool is used to view reports about IP set and DHCP operation. This tool is for administrator use only. 2. Network Diagnostic Tools The Network Diagnostic Tools menu contains tools that are used to diagnose network problems. This menu is for administrator use only. 3. Ethernet statistics The Ethernet statistics tool is used to view reports about Ethernet operation. This menu is for administrator use only. 4. IP networks statistics The IP networks statistics tool is used to view reports about network operation. This menu is for administrator use only. 5. USB device information The USB Devices tool provides information about any Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices that you connect to your phone. Your Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone automatically detects USB devices when you connect them to the USB port in the back of the telephone. 1 Double-press (Services) to open the Local Tools menu. 2 Press the 5 key on the telephone dialpad to select 5. USB Devices. USB Device information is displayed. 3 Press the Return soft key. 3. Network Configuration The Network Configuration tool displays information that was configured when the telephone was installed. This tool is for administrator use only. 4. Lock Menu The lock menu tool is used by the system administrator to protect the Local Tools menu items from accidental or unwanted changes. 22 Chapter 3 Configuring options NN40050-105 The lock menu tool is not available on all systems. If the menu entry appears dimmed, it is not enabled on your phone. Contact your administrator to find out of this feature is available for your use. 23 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide Chapter 4 Telephone setup Language choice Select the Primary Language for the telephone display. Choose one of the following three options: • Press Feature *501. Select the Alternate Language for the telephone display. • Press Feature *502. Select the Alternate Language 2 for the telephone display. • Press Feature *503. Select the Alternate Language 3 for the telephone display. Ring Type To select the ring type for your telephone: 1 Press Feature *6. 2 Press 1, 2, 3, 4, or Next to hear the different ring types. 3 Press OK to store the ring type. Call log Press Feature *812 and use the navigation keys to scroll through and edit the call log. Time offset When your Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone is located in a different time zone than your system, the display shows the system time instead of the local time. The Time Offset feature allows you to adjust the time that appears on the display. Before you begin, calculate the time difference, in hours, between the server time and local time. Note: For more information about the features available to your telephone and how to use them, refer to the BCM50 Telephone Features User Guide (N0027160) 24 Chapter 4 Telephone setup NN40050-105 To change the time that appears on your telephone display to local time: 1 Press Feature *510. 2 Press Change. 3 Press * to switch between adding or subtracting time. 4 Using the dialpad, enter the number of hours between local time and system time. 5 Press OK. About your programmable buttons Your System Administrator assigns the four programmable buttons as line, intercom, or memory buttons. The label for each button appears on the display next to the button. For more information, contact your System Administrator. Memory buttons These are buttons that are not assigned as line or intercom buttons. Memory buttons store internal and external phone numbers or features to give you one-touch dialing or feature activation. Program memory buttons You can program a memory button with a new phone number or feature. External autodial 1 Press Feature *1. 2 Press a memory button. 3 Dial the external phone number. 4 Press OK to store the phone number. Note: Press # to enter half-hour increments. Note: It may take up to 1 minute for the change to appear on the display. Chapter 4 Telephone setup 25 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide Internal autodial 1 Press Feature *2. 2 Press a memory button. 3 Dial the extension number. 4 Press OK to store the extension number. Features 1 Press Feature *3. 2 Press a memory button. 3 Press Feature and enter the feature code. 4 Press OK to store the feature code. Erase memory buttons 1 Press Feature *1. 2 Press a memory button. 3 Press OK to erase the phone number saved on the button. Making a call There are many ways to place a call depending on your telephone programming and the type of call. Making external calls using line soft keys 1 Lift the handset. 2 Tap a line soft key. 3 Dial the external telephone number. Making external calls using intercom soft keys 1 Lift the handset. 2 Tap an intercom soft key, and enter a line pool access code. 3 When you hear an external dial tone, dial the external telephone number. Note: Contact your system administrator for a list of line pool codes. When entering a line pool access code on PRI lines, you do not hear a dial tone. 26 Chapter 4 Telephone setup NN40050-105 Making internal calls using intercom soft keys 1 Lift the handset. 2 Tap an intercom soft key. 3 Dial the extension number. Contact your system administrator for a list of extension numbers. Answering a call When your telephone rings and the light flashes, or when an intercom or line soft key indicator flashes: • Lift the handset. OR • Press the line or intercom soft key with the flashing S indicator before you lift the handset. While on an active call Placing a call on hold Calls are put on hold automatically when you switch from one line to another. • While on a call, press (Hold). TheSindicator for the line on hold flashes. • To retrieve a held call, tap the line soft key with the flashing Sindicator. Using handsfree Your System Administrator must program the Handsfree feature for your telephone. • Press (Handsfree) to make or answer a call. • To switch to handsfree when you are on a handset call, press (Handsfree) and replace the handset. Lift the handset to switch back. • To switch to handsfree when you are on a headset call, press (Handsfree) Press (Headset)to switch back. Using a headset You must have a headset installed on your telephone to use this feature. • Press (Headset) to activate the headset mode. When the (Headset) light is on, press a line or intercom soft key to make a call. Chapter 4 Telephone setup 27 Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone User Guide • To switch to your headset when you are on a handset call, press (Headset) and replace the handset. Lift the handset to switch back. • To switch to your headset when you are on a Handsfree call, press (Headset). Press (Handsfree) to switch back Muting the Microphone You can use mute( ) on handset, handsfree, or headset calls. • While on a call, press (Mute) to turn the microphone off. The (Mute) button lights when the microphone is off. • Press (Mute) again to turn the microphone on. Accessing External Server Applications Use External Server Applications to access a variety of applications directly from your Avaya 1140E IP Deskphone. To find out what features and services are available, contact your system administrator. Depending on what is available on your system, your phone can provide information; for example, local news and weather, stock market information, or traffic reports. For more information about the External Server Applications, consult the Avaya IP Deskphone External Server Applications User Guide. 28 Chapter 4 Telephone setup NN40050-105

To change the ring tones on your phone: If allowed by your extension’s Class of Service, you can customize ringing for your telephone. See Distinctive Ringing in the Telephone Feature Handbook for more. 1. Push Menu+ Dial 40 + Push Select. 2. Push Nextto scroll to the ring option you want to customize. 3. For the selected option, push Selectand follow the on-screen guidance to enter the options. – 41: Key Assignments enables you to set the ringing mode for Line Keys, Call Coverage Keys, and Call Pickup Keys. After selecting a key type, press an illuminated key repeatedly to set the ringing mode. The available ringing modes are Always, Night Ring, Delay Ring, and Lamp Only. – 42: Tone Assignments allows you to assign a ring type to the Day Ring, Night Ring, and Delay Ring ringing modes. You can choose between Line Setting (default), Line-Type “A”, Line-Type “B”, and “Line-Type C”. (See the next step to configure the tones for types A, B, and C.) – 43: Tone Configuration lets you set up the specific tone of the Intercom, Ring Groups, Recall, Line-Type “A”, Line-Type “B”, and Line-Type “C” ring types. For each type, you can select one of 10 preset tones (0-9). You can also use this option to set the tones back to factory default. Dialing By Name (Directory Dialing) To dial a co-worker or outside call by selecting from a group of names: 1. Push Dir. 2. Select a Directory Dialing type: – To call a co-worker, push Ext. – To call a Personal Speed Dial number, push Pers. – To call a Company-Wide Speed Dial number, push Cmpy. 3. To scroll, push Prevor Nextto scroll through selected lists. To search, start dialing letters for the name. The search will narrow as you enter additional letters. 4. Push Dialto call the displayed name. – Alternately push Back+ Exitto exit. 11 Installing And Using a Headset Features to make you More Productive To install an optional corded headset: 1. Plug the headset cord into the headset jack on the bottom of the telephone. 2. The headset cord routes through the upper channel on the right side of the telephone base. To set up a headset Feature Key: 1. Push Menu+ Dial 51 + Press Feature Key. 2. Push Selectthen >>repeatedly to scroll to Headset. 3. Push Selectto choose the Headset assignment. 3. Push Back+ Exitto exit. To turn the headset mode on and off: 1. Press your Headset Feature Key. – The headset key is on while in the headset mode; off while in the normal handset mode. – You can optionally push Menuand dial 91. To use your headset: 1. While in the headset mode, you can do the following: – Press a line key to place or answer an outside call. – Press INTERCOM to dial a co-worker on the Intercom. – While on a call, press SPEAKER to hang up. 2. Keeping the above three things in mind, process calls normally using the convenience of a headset. About the DSX Wireless Headset Adapter (WHA) The DSX Wireless Headset Adapter allows you to connect a Plantronics Wireless Headset System directly to the headset jack on specific models of DSX telephones. The DSX Wireless Headset Adapter tightly integrates your headset system with the DSX to provide enhanced wireless mobility and call answering. The Plantronics lifter is not required. To learn more, download the DSX Wireless Headset Adapter User guide from www.necdsx.com.

Affordable and Reliable NEC designed the DSX with affordability and scalability in mind. Since DSX is simple to install and easy to use, the expenses of configuration, programming, and post-installation training are minimized. Over a decade of intense feature development ensures that the core DSX call processing features are mature, efficient, and reliable – yet intuitive and easy to use. Now with VoIP Install DSX IP keysets on-premise in a managed network or off-site in a remote office. Choose between two types of DSX IP extensions: the 34-Button Backlit Display and the 34-Button Backlit Super Display. These feature-rich IP keysets offer the same features as their digital counterparts, have Full Duplex speakerphones, and are quick to set up in an IP environment. Compliant third-party SIP phones, soft phones, and Analog Telephone Adapters (ATAs) are also supported. Innovative NEC takes the lead with state-of-the-art innovations sure to make your business communications more efficient, profitable, and enjoyable. The DSX telephone superior styling is an attractive addition to any work environment. All models feature a built-in speakerphone, two-position angle adjustment, and built-in wall mounting. Enhanced models also offer a backlit display and illuminated dial pad. Innovations don’t stop with the DSX telephones. Right out of the box, the system has a built-in Automated Attendant which can answer incoming calls, play a greeting, and allow callers to dial extensions and departments directly without operator assistance or additional equipment. Also built-in is the ability to record a custom message for callers on hold. DSX is sized right – from the economical DSX-40 to the DSX-80/160. To maintain the value of your investment, all DSX-80 cards can be migrated to the DSX-160. Even when growing from the DSX-40, your investment in IntraMail, programming, telephones, and other station equipment is retained. IntraMail The ability to add voice mail is built into the system and only requires a compact flash card to activate. IntraMail is a full-featured Voice Mail Auto Attendant system that will greet and transfer incoming callers and record voice mail messages. With built-in voice prompt guidance in English, Spanish, and French, IntraMail is a great fit in multilingual environments. From 2 to 8 voice mail ports are available and easily upgraded through licensing. Some of the advanced features of IntraMail include: Message Center – Notify groups of extensions of important messages with visual indication using a message center key. Directory Dialing – Dial a name instead of a number to reach your party. Message on Hold – Record your own informative company message. Caller ID – Caller information is verbally provided with a voice mail message. Message Notification – You can receive a call - anywhere - when a new message arrives. Conversation Record – Save and record your conversation with the touch of a button. Live Call Screening – Listen as callers are leaving you a message and pick up only the calls you want to answer. Park and Page – Allows a caller to page you without operator assistance. You can pick up the call from any extension. Sophistication Simplified Put IntraMail and IntraMail Pro to Work for You IntraMail Pro Supports all of the features of the IntraMail plus: Email Integration – Receive notification of a new voice mail message to your inbox. The notification includes the caller’s number and name and can optionally include the recorded message as a .WAV file attachment. Cascading Message Notification – Cascading Message Notification can call you at up to five preset destinations to let you know a new voice mail message has arrived. Find Me Follow Me – Helps an Automated Attendant caller find you when you are not at your desk. Upgrade License – Simple license upgrade from IntraMail to IntraMail Pro. Logging – Stores the name, number and time/date of outside calls. This allows for easy review, save and redial of received calls. Checking – A manager can have the capability to view Caller ID information associated with a co-worker's line or extension. Return Call – Easily return a call without manually reentering the caller’s number. Select from a list of choices or have the system automatically redial the call for you. To Analog Ports – Caller ID information can be sent to analog single line ports for use with customer-provided Caller ID accessories. Built-in Caller ID (with Call Waiting) The capability for Caller ID (with Call Waiting) is inherent in every DSX system. With Caller ID, you can identify incoming callers before the call is answered. The caller’s name and number (if available) will appear simultaneously in the display. Office Administrator PC Program An office supervisor can quickly customize basic system features from their PC with the WindowsTM-based Office Administrator. This includes the Time and Date options, important extension feature and voice mail options, and Speed Dial numbers. These features can also be programmed from an office administrator’s phone. Customize Your Communication Solution 22-Button Display Offers a large display, programmable keys, and a built-in speakerphone – making this the most economical option without sacrificing convenience. 34-Button Super Display 2 All the features of the 34-Button Display and offers our largest, most interactive display for advanced users. Unique light sensor automatically adjusts the phone’s brightness based on room lighting. Cordless DECT Offers mobility plus many standard features of the wired telephone, including handsfree, 8 programmable feature keys with LEDs, and a backlit display. Range is extendable via repeaters. 1 Select models. 2 Available in IP and digital telephone models. Advanced telephone features include: Backlit Display and Illuminated Dial Pad1 – for easy viewing in low light areas. Interactive Soft Keys – that change function as you use your phone, allowing you to access to advanced features by just pressing a key. User Level Programming – easy and intuitive guided menu system for customizing the features of your telephone. Hot Dial Pad – that lets you dial a call without first lifting the handset or pressing keys. Dual color (red/green) LEDs – to help you easily distinguish between your calls and those of co-workers. Desk Stand – adjustable for two different positions. Wall Mounting – built-in for low-profile wall mounting capability. 34-Button Display 2 The same features as the 22-Button Display, plus additional programmable keys, and is enhanced with a backlit display and illuminated dial pad. DSS Console For power users, provides another 60 dual color programmable keys. DSX digital telephones and console are available in black or white. IP and cordless telephones are available in black only. Wireless Headset Adapter1 Provides seamless integration with Plantronics Wireless Headset Systems. (Headset System not included.) (1093060) To find out more about the DSX and how NEC’s powerful and versatile technology platforms can work for you, contact your local NEC dealer, visit our web site at www.necdsx.com, or call 800-365-1928. ©NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. 7/09 6555 N. State Hwy 161, Irving, Texas 75039 DSX is a trademark of NEC Infrontia Corporation. Some features may be optional or available at a future date. Recording of phone calls is subject to varying state and federal laws. The information herein is subject to change without notice at the sole discretion of NEC. Specifications1 DSX-40 Base Max1 Digital Stations 8 24 VoIP Stations 324 324 VoIP Gateway Ports 8 8 Analog Stations 2 18 Lines 4 8 Door Box Ports 2 2 DSX-80 Slots 4 Digital Stations 32 VoIP Stations 324 VoIP Gateway Ports 16 Analog Stations 32 Lines 64 DSX-160 Slots 8 Digital Stations 96 VoIP Stations 324 VoIP Gateway Ports 16 Analog Stations 96 Lines 64 IntraMail Voice Mail Ports 2, 4, 6, or 8 Storage Hours 8, 16, or 323 Subscriber Mailboxes 128 General One Pair Wiring USB 2.0 (Full Speed) 10/100 BASE-TX Ethernet, Auto-MDIX RS-232 Serial Port for SMDR DSX Features 2-Position Telephone Angle Adjustment Account Codes Alphanumeric Display Ambient Light Sensor Attendant Position Auto Redial Auto Attendant (Built-in) Automatic Daylight Savings Time Adjustment Automatic Handsfree Automatic Ring Down Background Music Backlit Display (selected models) Barge In (Intrusion) Battery Backed-up Memory Call Coverage Keys Call Forwarding On and Off Premises Call Timer (with or without a key) Call Waiting / Camp-On Callback Caller ID (with Call Waiting) Caller ID Logging (CID with Return Call) Caller ID Manual Callback Caller ID to Single Line Telephones Class of Service Conference (up to 8 parties per conference) Conference, Meet-Me Conference, Unsupervised Cordless Telephone Delayed Ringing Department Groups (for Ring and UCD Groups) Dial Number Preview Dial Tone Detection Direct Inward Dialing (with ANI/DNIS and DID Translation Name)2 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Directed Call Pickup Directory Dialing with Search Distinctive Ring (ICM, CO, Ring Grp, Recall) Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Override Door Box (Analog) Extended Ringing Extension Hunting (Circular, Terminal, UCD) Extension Locking Flash Flexible Numbering Plan Forced Line Disconnect Group Call Pickup Group Listen Group Ring Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback Headset Compatibility Hold (with Recall Display) Hold and Park Programmable Recall Cycles Hot Dial Pad Hotline Illuminated Dial Pad (selected models) Interactive Soft Keys Intercom Intercom Queue Key Internet Time Service ISDN / PRI2 Language Selection Last Number Redial Line Groups Line Keys Line Queuing / Callback Line Scheduling Loop Keys Meet-Me Conference Message on Hold (Built-in) Message Waiting Microphone Mute Modem (Built-In) Monitor / Silent Monitor Music on Hold Names for Extensions and Lines Night Service / Night Ring Off-Hook Signaling Office Administrator PC Program Paging (Internal and External) Park (with Recall Display) Park Orbit Recall Pickup Password Reset Utility PBX / Centrex Compatibility PC Program (System Administrator) Prime Line Preference Privacy Privacy Release Groups Private Line PRI / ISDN2 PRI Calling Party Number Pulse to Tone Conversion Remote Programming Removing Lines and Extensions From Service Reverse Voice Over Ring / Message Lamp Ringdown Extension Ringing Line Preference Room Monitor Save Number Dialed Selectable Display Messaging Silent Monitor Single Line Telephones Speakerphone Speed Dial Split (Alternate) Station Message Detail Recording System Programming Backup and Restore System Programming Password Protection T1 Lines2 Tie Lines2 Time and Date Toll Restriction Transfer (with Recall Display) Upgrades via License for VoIP Ports User Level Programming Voice Mail Voice Over VoIP Extensions Volume and Contrast Controls Walking Class of Service Wall Mount / Desk Stand (Built-in) Wireless Headset Adapter (WHA) IntraMail Features Announcement Message Answering Machine Emulation / Call Screen Auto Time and Date Stamp Automated Attendant Broadcast Message Caller ID (with Return Call) Centrex Transfer Conversation Record Directory Dialing Distribution Lists Email Integration with Name3 External Transfer Fax Detection Find Me Follow Me3 Flexible Answering Schedules Interactive Soft Keys Message Center Mailbox Message Notification (Local and Remote) Message Notification (Cascading3) Multilingual Prompts (English, Spanish, French) Multiple Company Greeting (8) Number of Messages Displayed Park and Page Personal Greeting (3) Security Code (with Option) Single Digit Dialing System Administrator Upgrades via License for IntraMail Ports, and IntraMail Pro Voice Mail Overflow Voice Prompting Messages 1 Capacities listed are system maximums and may be limited by system configuration. 2 DSX-80/160 only. 3 Requires IntraMail Pro. 4 Connectivity limited by available VoIP Gateway ports. Rev. 2, 7/09 Printed in U.S.A.

NEC DSX TELEPHONES. IntraMail For additional resources, visit our Technical Support site on the web at http://www.necdsx.com . Components Features Specifications and Parts Empowered by Innovation Product Description Manual P/N 1093093 Rev 2, June 2006 Printed in U.S.A . 01.00.00 This manual has been developed by NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. It is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel, and should be read in its entirety before attempting to install or program the system. Any comments or suggestions for improving this manual would be appreciated. Forward your remarks to: NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. 4 Forest Parkway Shelton, CT 06484 www.necunifiedsolutions.com Nothing contained in this manual shall be deemed to be, and this manual does not constitute, a warranty of, or representation with respect to, any of the equipment covered. This manual is subject to change without notice and NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. has no obligation to provide any updates or corrections to this manual. Further, NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make changes in equipment design or components as it deems appropriate. No representation is made that this manual is complete or accurate in all respects and NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. shall not be liable for any errors or omissions. In no event shall NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. be liable for any incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this manual. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied or reproduced without prior written consent of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. ©2006 by NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in U.S.A. INNOVATIVE DSX from NEC takes the lead with state-of-the-art innovations sure to make your business communications more efficient, profitable, and enjoyable. Innovation starts with the new sleek DSX telephones. All models feature the same thin, floating design, two position angle adjustment for effortless viewing, and built in wall mounting. The 22-Button Display offers a large 3-line-by-24 character display, four interactive soft keys, and a built in speakerphone. The 34-Button Display is enhanced with a backlit display and illuminated dial pad (for improved low light viewing), as well as additional feature keys. A 34-Button Display advanced model provides a built-in half-duplex speakerphone. The 34-Button Super Display has all the features of the advanced 34-Button and additionally offers the user a 9-line-by-24-character display and 12 interactive soft keys. Rounding out the line, the DSX Cordless Telephone provides mobility and flexibility for those who spend much of the workday away from their desk. Complemented by 4 fully programmable Feature Keys, the DSX Cordless Telephone achieves a whole new level of convenience and mobility. Innovations don’t stop with the DSX telephones. Right out of the box the system has a two-port Automated Attendant with no optional equipment required. The capability for full-featured IntraMail Voice Mail with Automated Attendant is inherent in the system and only requires an IntraMail flash card to activate. Program on-site from the telephone or from a PC connected to the system’s ethernet or USB port. PC remote programming is available through the ethernet port or built-in modem. AFFORDABLE NEC designed DSX from the ground up with affordability in mind. Economy per port is maximized by highdensity circuitry. All DSX telephones have a speakerphone and display for increased functionality and total lower station cost. Native support for ISDN PRI and T1 provides maximum connectivity for low initial investment. Since DSX is simple to install and easy to use, the expenses of configuration, programming, and post-installation training are minimized. The cost-effective IntraMail provides sophisticated Voice Mail and Automated Attendant features previously available only with expensive add-ons or costly external units. It is available in two configurations: 4 port/8 hour and 8 port/16 hour. The IntraMail Automated Attendant includes the call answering features you demand such as dial access to extensions, unique day, night, and holiday answering (Flexible Answering Schedules), the ability for two companies to share the same IntraMail (Multiple Company Greetings), and the capability to dial employees by entering their names instead of extension numbers (Directory Dialing). IntraMail Voice Mail is much more than simple messaging. Advanced IntraMail features allow you to automatically place a return call to the message sender (Caller ID with Return Call), screen your incoming calls (Call Screening), forward a message to a co-worker (Message Forward), and send a call to a co-worker’s mailbox (Transfer to a Mailbox). DSX is sized right, starting with the economical 40-port DSX-40, growing into the 80-port DSX-80, and culminating in the 160-port DSX-160. To maintain the value of your investment, all the components of a DSX-80 can be used in DSX-160 just by adding a DSX-160 cabinet. Even when growing from the DSX-40, your investment in programming, telephones and other station equipment is retained. RELIABLE Over a decade of intense feature development ensures that the core DSX call processing features are mature, efficient, and reliable – yet intuitive and easy to use. Combined with end-to-end Quality Assurance and stateof- the-art circuit design (which achieves new standards for efficiency and economy), you are assured that DSX will be your reliable business partner for years to come. Innovative leadership and longevity are a rare combination among technology companies. Founded in 1899, NEC has grown to a nearly $50 billion enterprise that produces 15,000 products in 126 manufacturing plants worldwide. NEC pioneered the development of telephones and switching systems early in the 20th century, and has maintained a leadership position in communications and networking ever since. Table of Contents DSX Product Description Manual Table of Contents ◆ i Table of Contents Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DSX Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 22-Button Display Telephone with Speakerphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 34-Button Backlit Display Telephone with Speakerphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 34-Button Backlit Display Telephone with Full-Duplex Speakerphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 34-Button Backlit Super Display Telephone with Half-Duplex Speakerphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 60-Button DSS Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 DTH-1-1 Single Line Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 DTR-1-1 Single Line Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 DTR-1HM-1 Single Line Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 DSX Cordless Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 DSX Cordless Lite II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Headsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Corded Headsets for DSX Keysets and DTR/DTH SLTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 NEC / Plantronics Headsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 GN Netcom Headsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Headsets for DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 DESI Telephone Label System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 DESI Labeling Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 DESI Telephone Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 DSX-80/160 Common Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 DSX-80 4-Slot KSU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 DSX-160 8-Slot KSU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 DSX-80/160 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 DSX-80/160 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 DSX-80/160 CPU Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 DSX-80/160 Station Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 DSX-80/160 16 Port Digital Station (16ESIU) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 DSX-80/160 16 Port Analog Station (16SLIU) Card with HV Message Waiting. . . . . . . . . . 13 DSX-80/160 8 Port Analog Station (8SLIU) Card with HV Message Waiting. . . . . . . . . . . . 14 DSX-80/160 Line Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 DSX-80/160 T1/E1/PRI Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 DSX-80/160 16 Port CO Line (16COIU) Card with Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 DSX-80/160 8 Port CO Line (8COIU) Card with Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 IntraMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 DSX IntraMail 8 x 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 DSX IntraMail 4 x 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Miscellaneous Cards and Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 DSX Analog Door Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 DSX 2PGDAD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 DSX-80/160 System Load Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Table of Contents ii ◆ Table of Contents DSX Product Description Manual Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 How To Use This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Optional (Unforced) Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Forced Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Using Account Codes and Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Using Account Codes with Last Number Redial and Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Account Codes and Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Alphanumeric Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Attendant Call Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Operator Call Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Attendant Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Auto Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Automatic Handsfree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Automatic Slot Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Background Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Barge In (Intrusion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Call Coverage Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Call Forwarding Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Call Forwarding Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Call Forwarding Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Call Forwarding Toggle in a Personal Speed Dial Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Call Forwarding Confirmation Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Call Forwarding Off Premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Call Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Call Waiting / Camp-On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Single and Multiple Message Format Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Caller ID on the SMDR Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Caller ID Integration with Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Second Call Caller ID (Extension Level Call Waiting Caller ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Third Party Caller ID Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Caller ID Display Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Caller ID to Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Caller ID Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Central Office Calls, Answering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Answering Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Central Office Calls, Placing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Store and Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Check Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Cordless Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Delayed Ringing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Dial Number Preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Dial Tone Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Direct Inward Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 ANI/DNIS Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Table of Contents DSX Product Description Manual Table of Contents ◆ iii Direct Inward Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Night Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Direct Line Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Direct Station Selection (DSS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Default DSS Console Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Directed Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Directory Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Distinctive Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 The Distinctive Ringing Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Understanding Ring Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 When Multiple Calls Ring an Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Do Not Disturb BLF for Hotline and Call Coverage Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Do Not Disturb Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Door Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Door Box Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Door Box Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Extended Ringing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Extension Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Circular Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Terminal Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Extension Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Walking Class of Service and Extension Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Feature Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Flexible Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Forced Line Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Group Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Group Listen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Group Ring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Handsfree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Headset Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Headset Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Off-Hook Signaling and Headsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 System (Regular) Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Automatic Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Intercom Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Distinctive Flash Rate on Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Hold Recall Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Hotline Automatic Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Interactive Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Key Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Language Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Table of Contents iv ◆ Table of Contents DSX Product Description Manual Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Enhanced Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Line Group Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Line Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Line Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Answering Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Line Queuing / Line Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Line Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Line Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Line Queuing Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Switched Loop Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Fixed Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Answering Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Meet-Me Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Message Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Microphone Mute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Handsfree Reply Soft Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Monitor / Silent Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Names for Extensions and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Night Service / Night Ring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Night Service Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Off-Hook Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Off-Hook Signaling for Outside Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Off-Hook Signaling for Intercom Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Off-Hook Signaling for Hotline Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Paging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Internal Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 External Paging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Page Relay Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Outside Call Ringing Over External Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Intercom Ring Over External Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Door Chime Over External Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Background Music Over External Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Ring Over Page Volume Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Park. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Distinctive Flash Rate on Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Personal Park Orbit Recall Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 System Park Orbit Recall Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 PBX / Centrex Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 PBX/Centrex Access Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 PC Program (System Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Prime Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Idle Prime Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Intercom Prime Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Prime Line vs. Ringing Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Privacy Release Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Private Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Programmable Idle Menu Soft Keys (Super Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Pulse to Tone Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Table of Contents DSX Product Description Manual Table of Contents ◆ v Regional Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Removing Lines and Extensions from Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Reverse Voice Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Ringdown Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Ringing Line Preference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Prime Line vs. Ringing Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Save Number Dialed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Selectable Display Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Message Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Unique Speed Dial Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Storing Line Routing in a Speed Dial Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Centrex Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Chaining Bins for Dialing Long Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Split (Alternate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Station Instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Ring/Message Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Station Message Detail Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 System Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 System Programming Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 T1 Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 ANI/DNIS Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 FSK Caller ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Tie Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Toll Restriction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 The Toll Restriction Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Distinctive Flash Rate on Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Transfer Recall Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Handsfree Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Hotline Automatic Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 User Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Call Forwarding to Voice Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Leaving a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Transferring to Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Conversation Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Conversation Record Key for a Co-worker’s Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Personal Answering Machine Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Voice Mail Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Message Center Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Interactive Soft Key Shows New Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Voice Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Volume and Contrast Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Volume Control Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Display Brightness and Contrast Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Display Brightness and Contrast Control Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Table of Contents vi ◆ Table of Contents DSX Product Description Manual Walking Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Walking Class of Service and Extension Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 IntraMail Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 How To Use This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Start-Up (Default) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 IntraMail Feature Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Announcement Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Announcement Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Answer Schedule Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Answer Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 The Default Mailbox and Routing Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Answering Machine Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Auto Erase or Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Handling Partially Reviewed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Auto Time Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Automated Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Automated Attendant, Built-In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Automated Attendant Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Automatic Routing for Rotrary Dial Callers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Automatic Routing for Rotrary Dial Callers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Call Forward to a Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Call Forwarding a Subscriber’s Direct Inward Line to their Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Call Routing Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Call Screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Call Screening and Group Mailboxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Automatic Call Screening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Caller ID and Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Calling the Automated Attendant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Centrex Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Conversation Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Conversation Record Key for a Co-worker’s Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Dial Action Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Directory Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Directory Dialing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Erasing All Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Exiting a Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Extension Hunting to Voice Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 External Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Fax Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Flexible Answering Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Flexible Call Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Forced Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Getting Recorded Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Go to a Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Multiple Greetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Remote Greetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Group Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Ring Group Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Table of Contents DSX Product Description Manual Table of Contents ◆ vii UCD Group Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Understanding Group Mailbox Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Guest Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Hang Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Instruction Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Leaving a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Additional Options While Leaving a Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Listening to Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Handling Partially Reviewed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Telephone Display while Listening to a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Log Onto Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Local (On-site) Logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Remote Log On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Mailbox Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Mailbox Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Mailbox Security Code Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Make Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Message Count Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Message Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Message Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Message Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Message Listen Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Message Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 How Message Notification Works to Normal Telephone Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 How Message Notification Works to Digital Pager Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Message On Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Message Playback Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Message Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Message Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Message Retention Guard Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Message Storage Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Message Waiting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Multiple Company Greetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Next Call Routing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Subscriber Mailbox Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Logging Onto a Subscriber Mailbox while Listening to the Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Programming Voice Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Quick Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Record and Send a Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Recording Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Remote Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Routing Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Screened Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Screened vs. Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Screened Transfer and Inactive Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Security Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Single Digit Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Subscriber Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 System Administrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 System Administrator Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 System Re-initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Table of Contents viii ◆ Table of Contents DSX Product Description Manual Time and Date with Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Time and Date Stamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Time and Date Stamp with Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Transfer to a Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Transfer Message Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Transfer to a UCD Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Undefined Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Unscreened Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Screened vs. Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Unscreened Transfer and Inactive Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Voice Mail Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Voice Prompting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Volume Control with Voice Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Specifications and Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 DSX Telephones DSX Product Description Components ◆ 1 Components Components DSX Telephones DSX Telephones 22-Button Display Telephone with Speakerphone The 22-Button Display Telephone features a large 3 line-by-24 character alphanumeric display with 4 Interactive Soft Keys for intuitive feature access. It also provides 10 Personal Speed Dial bin keys, 12 programmable Feature Keys and 12 fixed function keys for streamlined operation. Additionally, this telephone offers a headset jack and built-in speakerphone. Unique features include dual LEDs, a Ring/Message Lamp (to show ringing, Caller ID, and voice mail messages), built-in wall mounting, and an innovative two position angle adjustment. 34-Button Backlit Display Telephone with Speakerphone The 34-Button Display Telephone features a large 3 line-by-24 character backlit alphanumeric display with 4 Interactive Soft Keys for intuitive feature access. It also provides 10 Personal Speed Dial bin keys, 24 programmable Feature Keys and 12 fixed function keys for streamlined operation. Additionally, this telephone offers a backlit keypad, a headset jack, and built-in speakerphone. Unique features include dual LEDs, a Ring/Message Lamp (to show ringing, Caller ID, and voice mail messages), built-in wall mounting, and an innovative two position angle adjustment. At a Glance P/Ns 1090020 (Black) and 1090025 (White) Display: 3 line x 24 character Speakerphone: Built-in, half-duplex Soft Keys: 4 Wall Mount: Built-in Feature Keys: 12 Angle Adjustment: 2 position built-in Fixed Function Keys: 12 Backlit: No Speed Dial Bin Keys: 10 Dual LEDs: Yes Headset jack: RJ-10 built-in At a Glance P/Ns 1090021 (Black) and 1090026 (White) Display: 3 line x 24 character Speakerphone: Built-in, half-duplex Soft Keys: 4 Wall Mount: Built-in Feature Keys: 24 Angle Adjustment: 2 position built-in Fixed Function Keys: 12 Backlit: Yes Speed Dial Bin Keys: 10 Dual LEDs: Yes Headset jack: RJ-10 built-in DSX Telephones 2 ◆ Components DSX Product Description 34-Button Backlit Display Telephone with Full-Duplex Speakerphone This feature-rich 34-Button Display Telephone features a large 3 line-by-24 character backlit alphanumeric display with 4 Interactive Soft Keys for intuitive feature access. It also provides 10 Personal Speed Dial bin keys, 24 programmable Feature Keys and 12 fixed function keys for streamlined operation. Additionally, this telephone offers a built-in full duplex speakerphone (with no external speaker or microphone required), a backlit keypad, and a headset jack. Unique features include dual LEDs, a Ring/Message Lamp (to show ringing, Caller ID, and voice mail messages), built-in wall mounting, and an innovative two position angle adjustment. 34-Button Backlit Super Display Telephone with Half-Duplex Speakerphone The Super Display Telephone is the system’s most sophisticated telephone instrument. It features a large 9 line-by-24 character backlit alphanumeric display with 12 Interactive Soft Keys for intuitive feature access. It also provides 10 Personal Speed Dial bin keys, 24 programmable Feature Keys and 12 fixed function keys for streamlined operation. Additionally, this telephone offers a built-in full duplex speakerphone (with no external speaker or microphone required), a backlit keypad, and a headset jack. Unique features include dual LEDs, a Ring/Message Lamp (to show ringing, Caller ID, and voice mail messages), built-in wall mounting, and an innovative two position angle adjustment. 60-Button DSS Console The 60-Button DSS Console provides a display keyset with a 60-button Busy Lamp Field (BLF) and onebutton access to extensions, trunks, and selected system features. Enhanced by Answer, Release, and Transfer fixed function keys, the 60-Button DSS Console is a great time saver for users that do a lot of call processing (such as operators or dispatchers). By default, the DSS Console is set up with Hotline keys to extensions and 14 feature keys for quick access to Page, Park and the system Night Mode Note: DSX80/160 supports DS1000/2000 telephones if the system has a DSTU Card (P/N 80021A) installed. At a Glance P/Ns 1090022 (Black) and 1090027 (White) Display: 3 line x 24 character Speakerphone: Built-in, full-duplex Soft Keys: 4 Wall Mount: Built-in Feature Keys: 24 Angle Adjustment: 2 position built-in Fixed Function Keys: 12 Backlit: Yes Speed Dial Bin Keys: 10 Dual LEDs: Yes Headset jack: RJ-10 built-in At a Glance P/Ns 1090030 (Black) and 1090031 (White) Display: 9 line x 24 character Speakerphone: Built-in, half-duplex Soft Keys: 12 Wall Mount: Built-in Feature Keys: 24 Angle Adjustment: 2 position built-in Fixed Function Keys: 12 Backlit: Yes Speed Dial Bin Keys: 10 Dual LEDs: Yes Headset jack: RJ-10 built-in At a Glance P/Ns 1090024 (Black) and 1090029 (White) Feature Keys: 60 Wall Mount: Built-in Fixed Function Keys: 3 Angle Adjustment: 2 position built-in Dual LEDs: No Single Line Telephones DSX Product Description Components ◆ 3 Components Single Line Telephones DTH-1-1 Single Line Telephone The DTH-1-1 is a cost-effective analog single line telephone that offers 5 fixed feature keys, 4 Speed Dial bin keys and Message Waiting. The built-in Message Waiting lamp will flash for incoming calls or when the user has a message. To simplify working in groups, The DTH-1-1 provides 3 selectable ring tones. DTR-1-1 Single Line Telephone The DTR-1-1 is a stylish yet rugged analog single line telephone with 5 fixed feature keys and Message Waiting. Similar to the DTH-1-1, the DTR-1-1 has a built in Message Waiting lamp that will flash for incoming calls or when the user has a message. The DTR-1-1 offers programmable ring pitch and volume. Built-in wall mounting and a bridged data jack for connecting a modem or answering machine are standard. DTR-1HM-1 Single Line Telephone The DTR-1HM-1 provides all the features of the DTR-1-1 in addition to two additional fixed function keys (for Hold and Speaker/Monitor) and 8 Speed Dial bin keys. For convenient on-hook dialing and call monitor, the DTR-1HM-1 also offers Handsfree Monitor. At a Glance P/N 780034 (Black) Fixed Function Keys: 5 Message Waiting: Yes Speed Dial Bin Keys: 4 Ring/Message Waiting Lamp: Yes Selectable Ring Tones: Yes Wall Mount: Built-in At a Glance P/Ns 780020 (Black) and 780021 (White) Fixed Function Keys: 5 Message Waiting: Yes Speed Dial Bin Keys: None Ring/Message Waiting Lamp: No Selectable Ring Tones: Yes Wall Mount: Built-in Handsfree Monitor: No At a Glance P/Ns 780025 (Black) and 780026 (White) Fixed Function Keys: 7 Message Waiting: Yes Speed Dial Bin Keys: 8 Ring/Message Waiting Lamp: Yes Selectable Ring Tones: Yes Wall Mount: Built-in Handsfree Monitor: Yes DSX Cordless Telephone 4 ◆ Components DSX Product Description DSX Cordless Telephone DSX Cordless Lite II The DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone (P/N 730087) is a 900 Mhz digital narrow band FM cordless telephone that provides mobility, flexibility and convenience for those who spend much of the workday away from their desk. Fully integrated with the DSX system, the DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone offers many standard features such as Call Forwarding, Call Coverage, Hotline, and Voice Mail. Complemented by 4 fully programmable function keys (with LEDs), the DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone achieves a whole new level of convenience and mobility. An easy-to-read 16-character by 2-line LCD display (with four status icons), volume controls, a rechargeable Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Pack, and a handy belt clip round out the elegant and affordable DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone. The Cordless II Lite Telephone includes the following: At a Glance P/N 730087 Display: 2 line x 16 character Transmission: 900 MHz Narrow Band FM Status Icons: 4 Range: 350 feet (site dependent) Feature Keys: 4 Max Units Per Site: 30 (12 in close proximity) Fixed Function Keys: 8 Battery Life: Up to 7 hours talk time Channels: 30 • Base Unit • Base Unit AC Adaptor (P/N 630618) • Base Wall Mount Bracket (P/N 730608) • Base Line Cord • Handset • Handset Charger (P/N 730632) • Handset Charger AC Adaptor (P/N 730619) • Handset Charger Wall Mount Bracket (P/N 730633) • Handset Battery (P/N 730631) • Belt Clip (P/N 730634) Headsets DSX Product Description Components ◆ 5 Components Headsets Corded Headsets for DSX Keysets and DTR/DTH SLTs The following corded headsets are compatible with DSX keysets and the DTR/DTH single line telephones. Check with your supplier for their latest offerings. NEC / Plantronics Headsets NEC / Plantronics Amplified Headsets NEC P/N Description Style Microphone Type Plantronics Model Number - Polaris Starset In-the-Ear Voice Tube P31 Noise Canceling P31N 750631 Polaris Mirage On-the-Ear Voice Tube P41 - Noise Canceling P41N 750632 Polaris Supra Monaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube P51 750636 Noise Canceling P51N - Polaris Supra Binaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube P61 750633 Noise Canceling P61N 750630 Polaris TriStar In-the-Ear Voice Tube P81 - Noise Canceling P81N 750634 Polaris Encore Monaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube P91 - Noise Canceling P91N - Polaris Encore Binaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube P101 760635 Noise Canceling P101N - DuoSet Convertible Over-the-Head, On-the-Ear Voice Tube P141 Noise Canceling P141N - DuoPro On-the-Ear Voice Tube P151 Noise Canceling P151N - DuoPro Over-the-Head Voice Tube P161 Noise Canceling P161N - DuoPro Convertible Over-the-Head, Voice Tube P171 - DuoPro Convertible Over-the-Head, Noise Canceling P171N - DuoPro Behind-the-Head Voice Tube P181 - DuoPro Behind-the-Head Noise Canceling P181N 750643 Polaris/SupraPlus Monaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube P251 750644 Polaris/SupraPlus NC Monaural Noise Canceling P251N - Polaris/SupraPlus NC Binaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube P261 750645 Polaris/SupraPlus NC Binaural Noise Canceling P261N - SupraPlus SL Monaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube P351 Noise Canceling P351N - SupraPlus SL Binaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube P361 Noise Canceling P361N Headsets 6 ◆ Components DSX Product Description NEC / Plantronics Non-Amplified Headsets 1 NEC P/N Description Style Microphone Type Plantronics Model Number - StarSet In-the-Ear Voice Tube H31 Noise Canceling H31N - Mirage On-the-Ear Voice Tube H41 Noise Canceling H41N - Supra Monaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube H51 Noise Canceling H51N - Supra Binaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube H61 Noise Canceling H61N - TriStar In-the-Ear Voice Tube H81 Noise Canceling H81N - Encore Monaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube H91 Noise Canceling H91N - Encore Binaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube H101 Noise Canceling H101N - Freehand Monaural In-the-Ear Voice Tube H131 Noise Canceling H131N - DuoSet Convertible Over-the-Head, On-the-Ear Voice Tube H141 Noise Canceling H141N - DuoPro On-the-Ear Voice Tube H151 H151N - DuoPro Over-the-Head Voice Tube H161 Noise Canceling H161N - DuoPro Convertible Over-the-Head, On-the-Ear Voice Tube H171 Noise Canceling H171N - DuoPro Behind-the-Head Voice Tube H181 Noise Canceling H181N - SupraPlus Monaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube H251 Noise Canceling H251N - SupraPlus Binaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube H261 Noise Canceling H261N - SupraPlus SL Monaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube H351 Noise Canceling H351N - SuproPlus SL Binaural Over-the-Head Voice Tube H361 Noise Canceling H361N 1 Requires Vista M12 Amplifier and Handset/Headset Switch Headsets DSX Product Description Components ◆ 7 Components GN Netcom Headsets GN Netcom Non-Amplified Headsets 1 Model Number Description Microphone Type Style GN 2110 STD01 2100 Sound Tube Monaural Sound-Tube Over-the-Head GN 2120 NCD01 2100 Flex Monaural Noise-Canceling Over-the-Head GN 2115 STD01 2100 SoundTube Binaural Sound-Tube Over-the-Head GN 2125 NCD01 2100 Flex Binaural Noise-Canceling Over-the-Head GN 2117 STD01 2100 SoundTube Monaural Sound-Tube On-the-Ear GN 2127 NCD01 2100 Flex Monaural Noise-Canceling On-the-Ear GN 2110 ST 2100 SoundTube Monaural Sound-Tube Over-the-Head GN 2120 NC 2100 Flex Monaural Noise-Canceling Over-the-Head GN 2115 ST 2100 SoundTube Binaural Sound-Tube Over-the-Head GN 2125 NC 2100 Flex Binaural Noise-Canceling Over-the-Head GN 2127 ST 2100 SoundTube Monaural Sound-Tube On-the-Ear GN 2127 NC 2100 Flex Monaural Noise-Canceling On-the-Ear 405-SF Surefit Monaural Voice-Tube 3-Way Convertible: Over-the-Head, Earhook, Earloops 405-FLEX-SF Surefit Monaural Noise-Canceling 405-UNC-SF Surefit Monaural Noise-canceling ADP-I ADDvantage Plus Monaural Noise-Canceling Over-the-Head ADP-II ADDvantage Plus Binaural Noise-Canceling Over-the-Head GN 2200 2200 Omega Monaural Noise-Canceling Over-the-Head GN 2225 2200 Omega Binaural Noise-Canceling Over-the-Head OG-I Orator-G Monaural Noise-Canceling Over-the-Head OG-II Orator-G Binaural Noise-Canceling Over-the-Head Contour LX-G Contour LX-G Monaural Noise-Canceling On-the-Ear Stratus Ultra-G Stratus Ultra-G Monaural Noise-Canceling On-the-Ear 805-Flex 805-Flex Binaural Noise-Canceling Under-the-Chin or Behind-the-Neck 1 Requires GN8000 MPA Amplifier and Headset Switch. Headsets 8 ◆ Components DSX Product Description Headsets for DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone The following headsets are available for the DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone: • M175 Headband Style (P/N 750637) • MX150 Earloop Style (P/N 750642) At a Glance P/N 750637 (M175) P/N 750642 (MX150) DESI Telephone Label System DSX Product Description Components ◆ 9 Components DESI Telephone Label System DESI Labeling Software DESI Labeling Software is a Windows-compatible application for printing customized key data on specially designed DESI telephone labels. Use DESI Labeling Software to create quick, professional custom labels that can be printed on virtually any office ink jet or laser printer. DESI Labeling Software features: • Automatic extension numbering • Label templates that can be saved for later use • Copy and paste functions • Perforated and die cut labels for a perfect fit • Choice of fonts and font colors • Space for incorporating company logo • User-printable background graphics (using DESI Preprint) DESI labeling software is provided on the DSX System Document CD included with each telephone system. DESI Telephone Labels The following DESI labels are available for DSX telephones. • For standard “replacement” applications: - 22-Button Display Standard - 34-Button Display Standard - 34-Button Super Display Standard - 60-Button DSS Console Standard The following DESI labels are available for the NEC analog single line telephones. • For DTR-1-1 - Black (P/N 780400) - Metallic green (P/N 780401) - Metallic silver (P/N 780402) - Lime green (P/N 780403) - Preprint (blank) (P/N 780459) At a Glance DESI Labeling Software At a Glance Labels for DSX Telephones Labels for NEC Single Line Telephones DESI Telephone Label System 10 ◆ Components DSX Product Description • For DTR-1HM-1 - Black (P/N 780404) - Metallic green (P/N 780405) - Metallic silver (P/N 780406) - Lime green (P/N 780407) - Preprint (blank) (P/N 780460) • For DTH-1-1 - Metallic silver (P/N 780450) DSX-80/160 Common Equipment DSX Product Description Components ◆ 11 Components DSX-80/160 Common Equipment DSX-80 4-Slot KSU The DSX-80 4-Slot KSU contains the CPU, 4 universal card slots and the system’s power supply. It provides 80 ports. It is wall-mountable, has a flip off cover and removable side panel for easy access. The cabinet has a handy translucent panel in the cover that allows you to get essential system status and troubleshooting information at a glance, without removing the cover. DSX-160 8-Slot KSU The DSX-160 8-Slot KSU contains the CPU slot, 8 universal card slots and up to 3 system power supplies (depending on Load Factor requirements). It provides 160 ports. Just like the DSX-80 4-Slot KSU, the DSX- 160 is wall-mountable, has a flip off cover and removable side panel for easy access. The DSX-160 also has a translucent panel in the cover for getting essential system status and troubleshooting at a glance DSX-80/160 Power Supply The power supply provides the various DC voltages required to power the DSX-80/160 Cards. The DSX-80 4-Slot KSU requires a single power supply. The DSX-160 8-Slot KSU requires up to 3 power supplies, depending on system configuration. At a Glance P/N 1090002 Slots: 4 Analog extensions (max.): 48 Ports: 80 Analog lines (max): 48 Digital extensions (max.): 32 Digital (T1) lines (max.): 64 • Capacities determined by System Load Factor. • Always install a 16ESIU Card in the first universal slot. At a Glance P/N 1090003 Slots: 8 Analog extensions (max.): 112 Ports: 160 Analog lines (max): 64 Digital extensions (max.): 96 Digital (T1) lines (max.): 64 • Capacities determined by System Load Factor. • Always install a 16ESIU Card in the first universal slot. • Install one power supply for every two 16ESIU Cards. At a Glance P/N 1091008 DSX-80 Qty: 1 DSX-160 Qty: 3 (max.) • Quantity required in DSX-160 determined by System Load Factor. • In DSX-160, Install one power supply for every two 16ESIU Cards. DSX-80/160 CPU 12 ◆ Components DSX Product Description DSX-80/160 CPU DSX-80/160 CPU Card The CPU Card is the system’s control center. It provides the system’s Linux operating system, central processing, stored program, and memory for the customer’s site-specific data. Every system requires a CPU Card. In addition, it also provides: • CompactFlash card interface (for IntraMail, software loading, and database backup) • Conference circuits, DTMF receivers and DTMF generators • Real Time Clock • NAND Flash for storing the system database • Battery for short term (14 day) backup of the Real Time Clock and station parameters • Two audio inputs for Background Music and Music on Hold (1/8” mono minijacks) • One audio output for External Paging (1/8” mono minijack) • Ethernet and USB ports for local and remote PC Programming • RS-232 serial port for Station Message Detail Recording • Built-in V.32BIS 14.4K BPS modem for remote maintenance The CPU also has a reset switch that provides the following three functions: 1. System reset (when momentarily pressed). 2. System initialization (when held down as power is turned on). 3. Software update (when held down for six seconds while software update CompactFlash card is installed). Tips to remember: • When connecting to the CPU audio inputs or outputs, make sure the connected device is compatible with the CPU audio specifications. See Specifications and Parts (page 139) for more. At a Glance P/N 1090010 Audio Inputs: 2 RS 232 connector: Yes (for SMDR) Audio outputs: 1 Ethernet port: Yes USB connector: Yes CompactFlash interface: Yes DSX-80/160 Station Cards DSX Product Description Components ◆ 13 Components DSX-80/160 Station Cards DSX-80/160 16 Port Digital Station (16ESIU) Card Each 16ESIU Card connects 16 digital extensions (i.e., DSX keysets). The 16ESIU has a Mode Switch (for taking the card out of service). It also has a status LED that indicates proper card operation — as well as a port activity LED that flashes faster as traffic on the card increases. You can install up to two 16ESIU Cards in a DSX-80. You can install up to six 16ESIU Cards in a DSX-160. See System Configuration (page 19) for more. Tips to remember: • In DSX-160, you must install a separate power supply for every two 16ESIU Cards installed. • In both DSX-80 and DSX-160, you must install a 16ESIU Card in slot 1. • You can install additional 16ESIU Cards in any slot. DSX-80/160 16 Port Analog Station (16SLIU) Card with HV Message Waiting The 16SLIU Card connects 16 analog extensions which are typically used for single line telephones and fax machines. Just like the 16ESIU Card, the 16SLIU Card has a Mode Switch (for taking the card out of service), a status LED indicating proper card operation, and a port activity LED to indicate traffic on the card.See System Configuration (page 19) for more. Tips to remember: • The 16SLIU Card provides high voltage message waiting for single line sets with high voltage message waiting lamps. • The 16SLIU Card also provides Caller ID to single line sets. • You can install a 16SLIU Card in any slot except slot 1. At a Glance P/N 1091004 Digital station ports: 16 Status LED: Yes Mode switch: Yes Activity LED: Yes Max. installed in DSX-80: 2 (32 station ports) Max. installed in DSX-160: 6 (96 station ports) At a Glance P/N 1091007 Analog station ports: 16 Activity LED: Yes High Voltage Message Waiting: Yes Mode switch: Yes Max. installed in DSX-80: 3 (48 station ports) Status LED: Yes Max. installed in DSX-160: 5 (80 station ports) DSX-80/160 Station Cards 14 ◆ Components DSX Product Description DSX-80/160 8 Port Analog Station (8SLIU) Card with HV Message Waiting The 8SLIU Card connects 8 analog extensions which are typically used for single line telephones and fax machines. The 8SLIU Card has a Mode Switch (for taking the card out of service), a status LED indicating proper card operation, and a port activity LED to indicate traffic on the card. See System Configuration (page 19) for more. Tips to remember: • The 8SLIU Card provides high voltage message waiting for single line sets with high voltage message waiting lamps. • The 8SLIU Card also provides Caller ID to single line sets. • You can install a 8SLIU Card in any slot except slot 1. At a Glance P/N 1091010 Analog station ports: 8 Activity LED: Yes High Voltage Message Waiting: Yes Mode switch: Yes Max. installed in DSX-80: 3 (24 station ports) Status LED: Yes Max. installed in DSX-160: 7 (56 station ports) DSX-80/160 Line Cards DSX Product Description Components ◆ 15 Components DSX-80/160 Line Cards DSX-80/160 T1/E1/PRI Line Card The T1/E1/PRI Line Card provides T1 advanced digital calling and gives the DSX-80/160 a maximum of 24 trunks in a single card slot. The available T1 line types include: • Loop Start (DTMF and Dial Pulse) • Ground Start (DTMF and Dial Pulse) • Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Wink Start (DTMF and Dial Pulse) • Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Immediate Start (DTMF and Dial Pulse) • E&M Tie Line Wink Start (DTMF and Dial Pulse) • E&M Tie Line Immediate Start (DTMF and Dial Pulse) Tips to remember: • Normally you connect the T1/E1/PRI Card to a separately-purchased Channel Service Unit (CSU). Use a standard straight-through CAT 5 cable to connect the T1/E1/PRI Card to the CSU. The CSU in turn connects to the telco smart jack. • The T1/E1/PRI Card also provides 32E1 support. E1 is not used in North America. • PRI is currently not available. • You can install a T1/E1/PRI Card in any slot except slot 1. DSX-80/160 16 Port CO Line (16COIU) Card with Caller ID The 16COIU Card supports 16 analog loop start CO lines. The card has a Mode Switch (for taking the card out of service), a status LED indicating proper card operation, and a port activity LED that indicates traffic on the card. Each 16COIU Card also provides two power failure cut-through circuits. When commercial AC power fails, the Card automatically cuts through two line circuits to two power failure single line telephones. See System Configuration (page 19) for more. Tips to remember: • The 16COIU provides built-in Caller ID. • You can install a 16COIU Card in any slot except for slot 1. At a Glance P/N 1091006 Line ports: 24 Activity LED: Yes Mode switch: Yes Diagnostic LEDs: Yes Status LED: Yes CSU required: Yes Max. installed in DSX-80: 3 (64 line ports in 3 T1/E1/PRI Cards, with 8 T1 circuits disabled in programming) Max. installed in DSX-160: 3 (64 line ports in 3 T1/E1/PRI Cards, with 8 T1 circuits disabled in programming) At a Glance P/N 1091005 Line ports: 16 Status LED: Yes Mode switch: Yes Activity LED: Yes Power Failure ports: 2 Caller ID: Built in Max. installed in DSX-80: 3 (48 lines in 3 16COIU Cards) Max. installed in DSX-160: 4 (64 line ports in 4 16COIU Cards) DSX-80/160 Line Cards 16 ◆ Components DSX Product Description DSX-80/160 8 Port CO Line (8COIU) Card with Caller ID The 8COIU Card supports 8 analog loop start CO lines. The card has a Mode Switch (for taking the card out of service), a status LED indicating proper card operation, and a port activity LED that indicates traffic on the card. Each 8COIU Card also provides two power failure cut-through circuits. When commercial AC power fails, the card automatically cuts through two line circuits to two power failure single line telephones. See System Configuration (page 19) for more. Tips to remember: • The 8COIU provides built-in Caller ID. • You can install a 8COIU Card in any slot except for slot 1. At a Glance P/N 1091009 Line ports: 8 Status LED: Yes Mode switch: Yes Activity LED: Yes Power Failure ports: 2 Caller ID: Built in Max. installed in DSX-80: 3 (24 line ports in 3 8COIU Cards) Max. installed in DSX-160: 7 (56 line ports in 7 8COIU Cards) IntraMail DSX Product Description Components ◆ 17 Components IntraMail DSX IntraMail 8 x 16 DSX IntraMail 4 x 8 IntraMail is a plug-in “in-skin” full-featured, DSP-based integrated Voice Mail with Automated Attendant for DSX. It is available in two models: • P/N 1091013 with 8 Voice Mail ports, 16 hours of message storage, and up to 160 mailboxes. • P/N 1091011 with 4 Voice Mail ports, 8 hours of message storage, and up to 160 mailboxes. The IntraMail Automated Attendant answers incoming calls and routes them quickly and efficiently. Integrated Voice Mail features include Conversation Record, Answering Machine Emulation, and Caller ID with Return Call. Interactive Soft Keys guide the display telephone user through the extensive IntraMail feature set. Tips to remember: • After plugging in the IntraMail CompactFlash card, IntraMail automatically installs on power-up. At a Glance P/N 1091013 Ports: 8 Storage Hours: 16 Routing Mailboxes: 16 Subscirber Mailboxes: 128 Ring Group Mailboxes: 8 UCD Group Mailboxes: 8 Total Mailboxes: 160 At a Glance P/N 1091011 Ports: 4 Storage Hours: 8 Routing Mailboxes: 16 Subscirber Mailboxes: 128 Ring Group Mailboxes: 8 UCD Group Mailboxes: 8 Total Mailboxes: 160 Miscellaneous Cards and Optional Equipment 18 ◆ Components DSX Product Description Miscellaneous Cards and Optional Equipment DSX Analog Door Box The Analog Door Box is a self-contained Intercom unit typically used to monitor an entrance door. A visitor at the door can press the Door Box call button (like a door bell). The Door Box then sends chime tones to all extensions programmed to receive chimes. To answer the chime, the called extension user just lifts the handset. This lets the extension user talk to the visitor at the Door Box. The Door Box is convenient to have at a delivery entrance, for example. It is not necessary to have company personnel monitor the delivery entrance; they just answer the Door Box chimes instead. Tips to remember: • The Analog Door Box is a weather-tight unit and can be mounted outside. • The maximum number of DSX Analog Door Boxes you can install is determined by the number of 2PGDAD Modules, which in turn is limited only by the availability of 16ESIU station ports. DSX 2PGDAD Module The DSX 2PGDAD Module provides connection and relays for two DSX Analog Door Boxes. This module connects to an available port on a DSX Digital Station (16ESIU) PCB. Tips to remember: • The maximum number of DSX Analog Door Boxes you can install is determined by the number of 2PGDAD Modules, which in turn is limited only by the availability of 16ESIU station ports. At a Glance P/N 922450 Requires 2PGDAD Module connected to DSX Digital Station (16ESIU) PCB. DSX-80/160: No built-in Door Box ports. At a Glance P/N 0891027 Provides connection and relays for two DSX Analog Door Boxes. Connects to port on DSX Digital Station (16ESIU) PCB. System Configuration DSX Product Description Components ◆ 19 Components System Configuration DSX-80/160 System Load Factor The combination of lines and extensions you can connect to your DSX system may be limited by the System Load Factor. Use the DSX-80/160 System Load Factor Worksheet on the next page to verify your system’s configuration. When entering data on the worksheet, for each installed card make entries for each Load Type. There are two Load Types to consider: 5 VDC and 40 VDC. To check your system configuration: 1. Indicate the quantity for each card installed in the Qty column. - The number of keysets, single line sets, and DSS Consoles does not affect the load factor. 2. For each item and for each Load Type, multiply the Qty times the Load and enter the value in the Total column. - For example, two 16ESIU Cards have a load of 16 for 5 VDC and 40 for 40 VDC. 3. Add up the entries in each Total column and enter the values in Item 1: Load Type Totals. 4. Review Item 2: Power Supply Capacity and determine the capacity of the power supplies installed in your system. 5. Compare the capacities in Item 2 to your entries in Item 1. Item 1 must always be equal to or less than the entry in Item 2. Important Do not operate your system if the total for either Load Type exceeds the Power Supply Capacity of your installation. System Configuration 20 ◆ Components DSX Product Description DSX-80/160 System Load Factor Worksheet Description Qty Load Type 5 VDC 40 VDC Load Total Load Total CPU Card 1 12 12 0 0 16ESIU Card 8 20 8SLIU Card 5 8 16SLIU Card 10 16 8COIU Card 3 0 16COIU Card 6 0 T1/E1/PRI Card 8 0 Item 1: Load Type Totals (Cannot exceed Item 2: Power Supply Capacity.) Item 2: Power Supply Capacity If you have one power supply installed, the capacity is: If you have two power supplies installed, the capacity is: If you have three power supplies installed, the capacity is: 5 VDC = 40 5 VDC = 80 5 VDC = 120 40 VDC = 48 40 VDC = 80 40 VDC = 120 Notes: • DSX-80 can only have 1 power supply. • DSX-160 can have up to 3 power supplies. You cannot have more than two 16ESIU Cards per power supply, regardless of System Load Factor calculations. • Exceeding the allowed Load Type Total (Item 1) will cause the system’s power supplies to automatically shut down and/or cause erratic system operation. • The total of all station, line, DSS Console, and voice mail ports cannot exceed 160. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 21 Features Features Introduction How To Use This Chapter This chapter provides detailed information on the system’s features. The features in this chapterare in alphabetical order, like a dictionary. Account Codes Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help categorize and/or restrict outside calls. Account Codes are from 2-10 digits long, using any combination of the digits 0-9. There are three types of Account Codes: ❥ Optional (Unforced Account Codes) ❥ Forced Account Codes ❥ Verified Account Codes Optional (Unforced) Account Codes Optional Account Codes allow a keyset extension user to enter an Account Code while placing an outside call or any time while on a call. This type of Account Code is optional: the system does not require the user to enter it. If the keyset user is already talking on an outside call, their conversation continues uninterrupted while they enter an Account Code. Single line telephone users can only enter an Account Code while placing their outside call. Forced Account Codes Forced Account Codes require an extension user to enter an Account Code every time they place an outside call. If the user doesn’t enter the code, the system prevents the call. The system can require Forced Account Codes for all outside calls, or just for toll calls (as determined by Toll Restriction programming). Note that Forced Account Codes do not pertain to incoming calls. Verified Account Codes With Verified Account Codes, the system compares the Account Code the user dials with a list of codes programmed into the Verified Account Code Table. If the Account Code is in the table, the call goes through (provided it is not prevented by an extension’s Toll Restriction programming). If the code is not in the table, the system prevents the call. Verified Account Codes, if enabled, apply only to Forced Account Codes. Use Account codes to categorize and/or restrict outside calls. 22 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Using Account Codes and Speed Dial To simplify Account Code operation, Personal and System Speed Dial bins can contain Account Codes. Keep the following in mind when using Speed Dial and Account Codes: ❥ The Account Code can be either the first or last entry in the bin, and must be preceded and followed by the # character. For example, the Account Code 1234 must be entered as #1234#. ❥ The Speed Dial bin can contain an Account Code followed by an outside number, or just the Account Code. The Account Code must be preceded and followed by a # entry. If the bin contains just the Account Code, the user must be sure to press the bin key before dialing the outside number. ❥ If the system has Verified Account Codes enabled, the Account Code entered in the Speed Dial bin must match an entry in the Verified Account Code Table. ❥ If the Speed Dial bin does not contain an Account Code, the user must enter the Account Code manually. If Forced Account Codes are enabled, the system requires the user to enter the Account Code before it outdials the stored Speed Dial number. ❥ An extension user can preselect a line for a Speed Dial call. Using Account Codes with Last Number Redial and Save Last Number Redial and Save do not store Account Codes. This means that the user must manually enter an Account Code to have it included with a call dialed using Last Number Redial and Save. If Forced Account Codes are enabled, the system requires the user to enter the Account Code before it outdials the stored number saved by Last Number Redial or Save. An extension user can preselect a line for a Last Number Redial or Save call. Account Codes and Emergency Calls Account Codes are never enforced for emergency (911 and 1+911) calls. Alphanumeric Display The 22- and 34-Button Display Telephones have a three-line, 24-character per line alphanumeric display. The first line displays the date and time (while idle) and feature status messages. The second line is used extensively by IntraMail. The third line displays the Soft Key definitions. The 34-Button Super Display Telephone has a nine-line, 24-character per line alphanumeric display. The first line displays the date and time (while idle) and feature status messages, just like the 22- and 34-Button Display Telephones. The second line is used extensively by IntraMail. Lines 4-9 are the comprehensive Super Display Telephone soft key definitions. ❥ To learn more about the display telephones: - see 22-Button Display Telephone on page 4 - see 34-Button Display Telephone on page 5 - see 34-Button Super Display Telephone on page 6 ❥ To learn more about the Soft Keys, see Interactive Soft Keys (page 50). Attendant Call Queuing An unlimited number of callers can queue for the attendant. The callers hear ringback while they wait for the attendant to answer — not busy tone. If you have the attendant as the overflow destination for Direct Inward Lines, for example, unanswered DILs will “stack up” at the attendant until they are answered. The Alphanumeric Display messages help the display telephone user process calls, identify callers and customize features. Attendant Call Queuing helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the attendant as the overflow destination for unanswered calls. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 23 Features Operator Call Key The last Feature Key on an attendant telephone is permanently assigned as an Operator Call key. When the operator has Intercom calls waiting to be answered, the calls queue under this key. The key winks (on) when calls are queued. The Operator Call key is a permanent assignment for all extensions assigned as operators. You cannot change this assignment. Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent, non-programmable feature. Attendant Position The attendant is the focal point for call processing within the system. The system can have up to four attendants. In addition to the features of a standard keyset, the attendant also has the following unique capabilities (refer to the respective feature for details): ❥ Attendant Call Queuing (page 22) Incoming Intercom calls from co-workers queue for the attendant. The callers never hear busy tone. ❥ Barge In (Intrusion) (page 25) The attendant can break into another extension user’s established call. This option is enabled in the attendant’s Class of Service (COS 1). ❥ Direct Line Access (page 36) Direct Line Access lets the attendant user dial a code to access an individual line. This option is enabled in the attendant’s Class of Service (COS 1). ❥ Forced Line Disconnect (page 45) In an emergency, the attendant can release (disconnect) another user’s active outside call. This option is enabled in the attendant’s Class of Service (COS 1). ❥ Line Queuing / Line Callback (page 53) The attendant can Camp-On (queue) for a busy line. This option is enabled in the attendant’s Class of Service (COS 1). ❥ Night Service / Night Ring (page 56) An attendant with a System Night key can put the system in the night mode. This option is enabled in the attendant’s Class of Service (COS 1). ❥ Removing Lines and Extensions from Service (page 65) The attendant can remove problem lines from service —then return them to service once the problem is corrected. This option is enabled because the attendant has Direct Line Access enabled in their Class of Service (COS 1). The attendant should use a 34-Button Display or 34-Button Super Display Telephone. In addition, most attendants should find a DSS Console helpful when processing calls. Auto Redial Auto Redial periodically redials a busy outside number. If a keyset user places an outside call and the call recipient is busy, the user can press a soft key to enable Auto Redial. The keyset user doesn’t have to retry the number, hoping it will go through. Auto Redial will periodically retry the number up to 15 times. Auto Redial cancels when the called party rings or answers, or when the extension: ❥ Places or answers another outside call. ❥ Receives an Intercom voice announcement or answers an Intercom call by lifting the handset or pressing SPEAKER. ❥ Presses SPEAKER to cancel Auto Redial. The attendant is the system’s call processing focal point. Instead of redialing, have Auto Redial periodically retry a busy outside number. 24 ◆ Features DSX Product Description ❥ Presses any other fixed feature key except MIC. ❥ Lifts and replaces the handset. ❥ Presses the CANCEL soft key (Super Display only). Automatic Handsfree Automatic Handsfree allows a keyset user to place or answer a call Handsfree by just pressing a key — without lifting the handset or pressing SPEAKER first. If enabled, the system provides Automatic Handsfree for: ❥ Call Coverage keys ❥ Central Office Calls (line and loop calls) ❥ Group Call Pickup keys ❥ Hotline Keys ❥ Intercom (INTERCOM key) ❥ Last Number Redial (REDIAL key) ❥ Paging keys ❥ Park keys ❥ Personal Speed Dial bin keys ❥ Personal and System Speed Dial Feature Keys The system always provides Automatic Handsfree for: ❥ Dial Number Preview ❥ Directory Dialing Automatic Slot Configuration Automatic Slot Configuration automatically sets up station and line PCBs when you initially power up the system. This simplifies installation because you don’t have to use system programming to activate station and line PCBs after you plug them in. Here’s how Automatic Slot Configuration works: 1. With power off, install your station and line PCBs. 2. With the system powered down, install the station and line PCBs from left to right in the order you want your extension and line numbers set up. • Be sure to install a 16ESIU PCB in the first slot (CN1). • You don’t have to group your station and line PCBs together, although it may be more convenient to do so. 3. Power up the system. 4. On power up, the system scans the PCBs from left to right and sets up the extension and line numbering as follows. • Extension numbers will begin with 300 in the first slot and increment from left to right. • Line numbers will begin with 101 (starting from the first installed line PCB) and will also increment from left to right. System reset does not cause reconfiguration. Automatic Slot Configuration is temporarily disabled during a system reset. Automatic Handsfree is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand to answer a call or use a feature. The system automatically installs PCBs when you power up the system. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 25 Features Background Music Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer-provided music source to speakers in keysets. If an extension user activates it, BGM plays whenever the extension is idle. Incoming calls and Paging announcements temporarily override (turn off) Background Music. Background Music requires a customer-provided external music. Barge In (Intrusion) Barge In permits an extension user to break into another extension user’s established call. This sets up a three-way conversation between the intruding extension and the two parties on the initial call. The user can Barge In on an Intercom call or outside call. Battery Backup In the event of commercial AC power failure, the NAND Flash memory on the CPU PCB permanently maintains the site database. Additionally, an internal battery on the CPU provides short-term backup of the system date and time (Real Time Clock) and certain station parameters (such as the Caller ID log). The battery will hold the Real Time Clock and station parameters for up to 10-14 days. When commercial AC power is restored, the system restarts with all programming and the time and date intact. Additional Battery Backup capability can be provided by a customer-supplied Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS). The length of time the UPS will power the system when power fails depends on the capacity of the UPS unit. Consult with the UPS manufacturer for the specifics.Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional details. Call Coverage Keys A keyset can have Call Coverage Keys for a co-worker’s extensions, Ring Group master numbers and UCD Group master numbers. The Call Coverage Key lights when the co-worker’s extension is busy, flashes slowly when the co-worker has an incoming call, and flashes fast when the co-worker is in Do Not Disturb. The Call Coverage Key can ring immediately when a call comes into the covered extension, ring after a delay or not ring at all. In addition, the keyset user can press the Call Coverage Key to intercept their co-worker’s incoming call. They can also go off hook and press the Call Coverage key to call the covered extension. An extension can have as many Call Coverage Keys as they have available Feature Keys on their telephone. Broadcast music through the telephone speaker for a more pleasing work environment. In an emergency, use Barge In to get through to a co-worker right away. CAUTION Unauthorized intrusion on calls using this feature may be interpreted as an invasion of privacy. The system provides permanent backup of system memory. Call Coverage keys allow an extension user to cover a co-worker’s calls from their own telephone. Call Coverage Key Busy Lamp Indications When the key is: The covered extension is: Off Idle or not installed 26 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Call Coverage Keys will intercept the following types of calls: ❥ Key Ring Calls ❥ Ringing Intercom calls ❥ Calls to a UCD Group master number ❥ Calls ringing a Group Ring master number ❥ Transferred calls Call Coverage Keys will not intercept a call ringing the attendant’s Operator Call Key. Call Forwarding Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their call to another extension. The types of Call Forwarding are: ❥ Call Forwarding when Not Answered Calls ringing the extension forward when not answered. ❥ Call Forwarding when Busy or Not Answered Calls ringing the extension forward when not answered, and all calls forward while the extension is busy. ❥ Call Forwarding Immediate All calls to the extension forward immediately. You can set up Call Forwarding to reroute all calls or just outside calls. If an extension with forwarding set for outside calls only receives a screened Transfer, the initial voice-announcement broadcasts at the extension. When the caller hangs up to complete the transfer, the outside call forwards as programmed. Call Forwarding Chaining Extension user’s can chain Call Forwards. For example, extension 301 can forward all calls immediately to 304, which in turn can forward all calls immediately to extension 302. Any co-worker calling 301 or 304 goes to 302 instead. If extension 302 is Call Forwarded to voice mail, callers to 301 or 304 go directly to 302’s mailbox. Call Forwarding Cancel Call Forwarding cancel allows a keyset user to dial a code to simultaneously cancel all Call Forwarding system- wide. The extension must have access level 4 or 5. Call Forwarding Key A keyset user can have a key on their telephone or DSS Console assigned as a Call Forwarding key. ❥ While the extension is idle, pressing the key puts the extension in the Call Forwarding programming mode - the same as pressing INTERCOM and dialing *3. On Busy Slow Flash Ringing Medium Flash Covered extension is in DND for outside calls (option 1). Fast Flash Covered extension is in DND for Intercom calls (option 2) or All Calls (option 3). Call Forwarding ensures that the user’s calls are covered when they are away from their work area. Call Coverage Key Busy Lamp Indications DSX Product Description Features ◆ 27 Features - If the extension has Call Forwarding enabled, and the user presses the key and waits (for at least 6 seconds), Call Forwarding is automatically cancelled. - If the extension has Call Forwarding disabled, and the user presses the key and waits (for at least 6 seconds), the prior Call Forwarding mode is automatically enabled (if any). ❥ While the extension is busy, pressing the key switches Call Forwarding on and off. Call Forwarding Toggle in a Personal Speed Dial Bin If an extension doesn’t have an available Feature Key for a Call Forwarding key, the user can program a Personal Speed Dial bin for similar operation (without the BLF). To do this: ❥ While on hook, dial #77. ❥ Press the key for the Personal Speed Dial bin you want to program + HOLD. ❥ For LINE/GRP/ICM, press INTERCOM + HOLD. ❥ For NUM, dial *3 + HOLD. ❥ For NA, enter a name of your choosing + HOLD. ❥ Press SPEAKER to exit. While the extension is idle, pressing the bin key puts the extension in the Call Forwarding programming mode - the same as pressing INTERCOM and dialing *3. ❥ If the extension has Call Forwarding enabled, and the user presses the bin key and waits (for at least 6 seconds), Call Forwarding is automatically cancelled. ❥ If the extension has Call Forwarding disabled, and the user presses the bin key and waits (for at least 6 seconds), the prior Call Forwarding mode is automatically enabled (if any). Call Forwarding Confirmation Tone Keyset users will hear a single confirmation beep after enabling or cancelling Call Forwarding. Single line telephone users will hear Intercom dial tone after enabling or cancelling Call Forwarding. Call Forwarding Off Premises Off Premises Call Forwarding allows a keyset user to forward their calls to an off-site location (such as a cell phone or remote office) if allowed by their Class of Service. Keyset users can stay in touch by having Off Premises Call Forwarding automatically forward their calls while they are away from the office. To set up Off Premises Call Forwarding, the user selects the line or Line Group over which the call should route, as well as the number the system should dial. The number dialed can be from an extension’s Personal Speed Dial bin containing an outside number, or the user can enter an outside number directly into their Personal Speed Dial bin 720. When a call rings the forwarded extension, the system selects the specified line or group and then outdials the stored number. Off Premises Call Forwarding reroutes: ❥ Intercom calls ❥ Transferred calls ❥ Direct Inward Lines Call Forwarding Key BLF This flash rate: Means: Off Call Forwarding is disabled. Fast flash The extension is in the Call Forwarding programming mode. Slow flash Call Forwarding is enabled at the extension. When a user is out of the office, they can send their calls to their home office or cell phone. 28 ◆ Features DSX Product Description ❥ UTRF (unscreened transfer) calls routed from the voice mail Automated Attendant ❥ Circular and Terminal Extension Hunting calls Off Premises Call Forwarding does not reroute: ❥ Key Ring calls ❥ Calls to a UCD Group master number. ❥ Group Ring calls (i.e., calls to a Ring Group master number) ❥ UCD Group Calls (i.e., calls to a UCD Group master number) ❥ Ringing Call Coverage key calls You can set up Off Premises Call Forwarding to reroute all calls or just outside calls. If an extension with forwarding set for outside calls only receives a screened Transfer, the initial voice-announcement broadcasts at the extension. When the caller hangs up to complete the transfer, the outside call forwards as programmed. Call Timer Call Timer lets a keyset user with a Call Timer key time their outside calls on the telephone display. There are two types of Call Timer keys: ❥ Manual Call Timer Any time while placing a call or while on a call, a display keyset user can press their Manual Call Timer key to start the Call Timer. The Call Timer will continue until the user hangs up or presses their Manual Call Timer key again. ❥ Automatic Call Timer In addition to the features of the Manual Call Timer key, the Automatic Call Timer key provides automatic timing for outside calls. When a display keyset with an Automatic Call Timer key places or answers an outside call, the Call Timer automatically starts when that outside call connects. The Automatic Call Timer does not automatically start for Intercom calls. The Automatic Call Timer can also work like a Manual Call Timer key. There is no need to have a Manual and Automatic Call Timer key on the same phone. The Call Timer feature also provides: ❥ Review of Previously Timed Call Any time after hanging up from a timed call, a display keyset user can press their Manual or Automatic Call Timer key to review the duration of that call. ❥ Timer Reset for Current Call While the display keyset user is timing their call, they can press CLEAR at any time to reset the Call Timer to 00:00:00. ❥ Automatic Timer Stop The system assigns the Call Timer to the active call. When the user terminates the active call, the Call Timer automatically shuts down. ❥ Wrap-up Timer Display After hanging up a timed call, a display keyset will show the Call Timer data for 6 seconds before returning the display to idle. This gives the extension user adequate time to make a record of the timed call, if desired. Call Waiting / Camp-On With Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line (Camp-On) without hanging up. When the user Camps-On (by dialing 2), the system signals the busy extension with two beeps indicating the first waiting call. (The busy extension can be on a handset or Handsfree call.) The call goes through when the extension becomes free. Call Timer helps users that must keep track of their time on the phone. Call Waiting helps busy extension users know when they have additional waiting calls. It also lets callers wait in line for a busy extension without being forgotten. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 29 Features If an extension has more than one caller waiting, they queue on a first-in/first-out basis (FIFO). The extension will not hear Camp-On beeps for additional waiting calls. Off-Hook Signaling also alerts the user when unanswered calls are waiting to get through. Turn to Off-Hook Signaling (page 57) for more. The following chart shows when the two types of Off-Hook Signaling occur. Note that Camp-On tones occur for an extension when they are the exclusive recipient of the call (such as a DIL). Callback When an extension user calls a busy co-worker, they can leave a Callback request for a return call. The system services Callback requests as follows: ❥ Caller at extension A leaves a Callback at extension B. - Caller can place or answer additional calls in the mean time. ❥ When extension B becomes idle, the system rings extension A. This is the Callback ring. ❥ Once caller A answers the Callback ring, the system rings (formerly busy) extension B. - If caller A doesn’t answer the Callback ring, the system cancels the Callback. ❥ As soon as caller B answers, the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B. An extension user can leave a Callback at many extensions simultaneously. The system processes the Callbacks as the extensions become free. In addition, many extensions can leave a Callback at the same extension. The system processes these Callbacks on a first-in/first-out (FIFO) basis. If an extension user leaves a Callback request and then fails to answer within four rings, the system cancels the Callback. Caller ID Caller ID allows a display keyset to show an incoming caller’s telephone number (called Directory Number or DN) and optional name as the call is ringing. Caller ID supports the telco’s Called Number Identification (CNI) and Called Number Delivery (CND) service, when available. These services provide the Caller ID information (i.e., messages) between the first and second ring burst of an incoming call. Caller ID provides the following features: Off-Hook Ringing Camp-On Tones Key Ring Yes No Transferred Outside Call Yes Yes Direct Inward Line Yes Yes Transfer from voice mail (UTRF) Yes Yes Call Coverage Key Yes No Group Call Pickup Key Yes No With Callback, a user does not have to repeatedly call a busy extension back, hoping to find it idle. Caller ID automatically displays the phone number and optional name for incoming outside calls. 30 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Single and Multiple Message Format Compatibility There are two types of Caller ID message formats currently available: Single Data Message Format (SDMF) and Multiple Data Message Format (MDMF). With Single Message Data Format, the telco sends only the caller’s phone number (DN). The DN can be up to 10 digits long. In Multiple Data Message Format, the telco sends the DN and the caller’s name. The DN for this format can be up to 15 digits long, and the name provided can consist of up to 15 ASCII characters. If no DN is received, no number or error message displays. Caller ID on the SMDR Report Caller ID data prints on the SMDR report. SDMF records print a single line which shows just the incoming number. MDMF records print on two lines, with the first line showing the number and the second line showing the name. Unlike the telephone display, the SMDR report can show the entire 15 digits in the DN, if required. Following is a sample SMDR report showing Caller ID data. The first two lines of the report show a complete MDMF record with both the caller’s number and name. The last two lines of the report show two Caller ID error messages: Private Number and Out of Area. The “IN” in the type column indicates that the records shown are for incoming calls. If no DN is received, no number or error message displays. Station Message Detail Recording 05/10/2005 11:11A ---+---+--------------------------------+----------+---------+--------+--- Sta|Lin| Number Dialed | Account | Start |Duration| T ---+---+--------------------------------+----------+---------+--------+--- 301| 02| 2139261000| |11:11:39A|00:00:13|IN 301| 02| ANDERSON ALLEN| |11:11:39A|00:00:13|IN 301| 02| Private Number| |11:12:26A|00:00:12|IN 301| 02| Out of Area Number| |11:13:16A|00:00:12|IN Caller ID Integration with Voice Mail Caller ID fully integrates with IntraMail, UltraMail, and the NVM-Series voice mail systems. This enables voice mail features such as Make Call with Caller ID. Make Call allows the voice mail subscriber to return a call to someone who left them a message without knowing the calling party’s phone number. Second Call Caller ID (Extension Level Call Waiting Caller ID) While a display keyset user is busy on a call, the system can show the Caller ID information for a waiting call. If the busy extension is programmed to receive Camp-On tones or Off-Hook Ringing from the waiting call, the system will send the Caller ID data to the busy telephone’s display. If the busy extension does not receive Camp-On tones or Off-Hook Ringing, it will also not receive the waiting call’s Caller ID. (Note that Caller ID data from a Camp-On is displayed only once, corresponding to the single Camp-On beep.) This is an internal system feature and does not use the telco’s Call Waiting Caller ID. Third Party Caller ID Check Third Party Caller ID Check allows an idle or busy keyset user to display the Caller ID data for another line. The line that the user checks can be ringing or busy. Caller ID Display Separator An extension’s display can optionally show a calling party number separator. The separator is a dash after the area code and after the local exchange on a 7 or 10 digit number. If disabled, the calling party number displays without a separator. Caller ID to Single Line Telephones The system provides Caller ID data to single line ports. This allows single line Caller ID telephones to receive the Caller ID data also available at keysets. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 31 Features On Intercom calls, the single line telephone display will show the extension number and name (if programmed) of the internal caller. Caller ID Logging When caller ID is enabled, Caller ID Logging stores a record of the caller’s number and name (if provided by the telco) for each outside call that rings an extension. This allows an extension user to easily review and redial their calls. The system can log records directly to an extension or to one of 8 Caller ID Logging Groups. All the extensions in the same Logging Group share the same Caller ID records. Each extension or Logging Group can store up to 99 Caller ID records. The system stores up to 1000 Caller ID records, allocated among all extensions and Caller ID Logging Groups. All Caller ID records are retained when the system is powered down or reset. If a line rings more than one extension simultaneously, the system logs the call at all ringing extensions. Central Office Calls, Answering The system provides flexible routing of incoming CO calls to meet the exact site requirements. Answering Priority When multiple calls ring an extension simultaneously, the system services the ringing calls in the following order: 1. Ringing Intercom call 2. Line or loop key (from lowest to highest) Central Office Calls, Placing The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing calls. A user can place a call by: ❥ Pressing a Line Key Any keyset can have line keys for one-touch access to specific lines. ❥ Pressing a Loop Key Loop Keys provide a user with one-touch access to the assigned Loop Group. Loop Groups can consist of one or more Line Groups. ❥ Using Line Dial-Up With Line Dial-Up, a user can select a specific line by pressing INTERCOM and dialing the Line Dial-Up code (#9) followed by the line number (1-64). ❥ Using Direct Line Access Direct Line Access allows a user to access a line by pressing INTERCOM and dialing the line’s extension number (e.g., 101 for line 1, 102 for line 2. etc.). ❥ Dialing a Line Group Access Code User’s can also place outside calls by pressing INTERCOM and dialing a Line Group Access Code (90-98). ❥ Line Group Routing If the system has Line Group Routing enabled, user’s get the first available line when they press INTERCOM and dial 9. An extension can store the caller’s name and phone number for easy review and redialing. The system allows outside calls to ring and be answered at any combination of system extensions. Customize the call placing options to meet the site requirements and each individual’s needs. 32 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Store and Forward Store and Forward is an alternate method of placing outside calls in which the system stores (“collects”) the digits a user dials, waits for the user to finish dialing, and then redials the digits on the selected line. Store and forward provides Intercom dial tone to the caller as soon as they dial a line access code or press a loop key, similar to conventional ARS operation. When the user has completed dialing, the system will dial out the call over the connected line after 6 seconds or when the user dials #. Store and Forward can also be an advantage when connected to a T1 service that does not provide line dial tone. Post dialing for Store and Forward calls is also available. After a user dials using Store and Forward, they can manually dial additional digits. The normal post dialing soft keys (such as AUTO REDIAL [ALND] for Auto Redial) are also enabled. ❥ Store and Forward does not apply to line keys, Direct Line Access, or line dial up (i.e., #9 plus the line number). ❥ You can use Account Codes with Store and Forward enabled (see Operation below). Check Key A keyset user can use the CHECK key to check keyset and DSS Console Feature Key assignments and Personal Speed Dial bin names. Class of Service Class of Service (COS) sets various features and options for extensions and outside lines. The system allows any number of extensions and lines to share the same Class of Service. The Class of Service options are provided by the following programs: ❥ 140x-Station Options - 1401-Features (page 628) - 1402-Access (page 633) - 1403-SLT’s (Single Line Telephone Options) (page 635) - 1404-Caller ID (page 638) - 1405-Distinctive Ringing (page 641) - 1406-Call Forwarding Options (page 643) - 1407-Paging (page 644) ❥ 141x-Line Options 1411-Access (page 647) Conference Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation. The following table shows the system’s Conference capacities: Quickly check keyset and DSS Console Feature Key assignments. Customize features and options for extensions and outside lines. A user can set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office. Description Capacity Conference circuits 32 Maximum simultaneous users in Conference (total of all Conferences system-wide) 32 DSX Product Description Features ◆ 33 Features The system’s 32 Conference circuits are dynamically allocated as users request them. Cordless Telephone The DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone (P/N 730087) is a 900 Mhz digital narrow band FM cordless telephone that provides mobility, flexibility and convenience for those who spend much of the workday away from their desk. Fully integrated with the DSX system, the DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone offers many standard features such as Call Forwarding, Call Coverage, Hotline, and Voice Mail. Complemented by 4 fully programmable function keys (with LEDs), the DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone achieves a whole new level of convenience and mobility. An easy-to-read 16-character by 2-line LCD display (with four status icons), volume controls, a rechargeable Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Pack, and a handy belt clip round out the elegant and affordable DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone. Delayed Ringing Delayed Ringing allows a line to start ringing a preset interval after the call starts flashing a line key. This is helpful for co-workers that cover each other’s calls. For example, a secretary can have Delayed Ringing for the lines that ring the boss’s telephone. If the boss doesn’t answer after the Delayed Ringing interval, the call will start ringing the secretary’s extension. Dial Number Preview Dial Number Preview lets a display keyset user dial and review a number before the system dials it out. Dial Tone Detection The system can optionally detect precise CO dial tone for automatically dialed outside calls (such as Speed Dial and Auto Redial calls). With Dial Tone Detection enabled for a line, the system will monitor the line when initially seized for valid dial tone or stutter dial tone. If valid EIA/TIA dial tone is detected, the system outdials the call on the line. If dial tone is not detected within 2 seconds, the system will try the next available line in the same line to which the initial line belongs. If another line in the group is not available, the user hears busy tone. Dial Tone Detection does not apply to manually dialed outside calls. If Dial Tone Detection is disabled, the system waits 500mS after line seizure and then outdials the number. If enabled, Dial Tone Detection applies to the following types of outside calls: ❥ Auto Redial (initial line seizure) ❥ Caller ID (callbacks) ❥ Last Number Redial ❥ Call Forwarding Off Premise Maximum simultaneous conferences 8 Maximum parties in any one Conference (lines and/or extensions) 8 Provides cordless mobility and a rich feature set for employees away from their desks. Delayed Ringing helps co-workers cover each other’s unanswered calls. Dial Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors. You can set up the system to detect CO dial tone. Description Capacity 34 ◆ Features DSX Product Description ❥ Save ❥ Speed Dial Direct Inward Dialing Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lets outside callers directly dial system extensions. DID saves time for callers who know the extension number they wish to reach. To place a DID call, the outside caller dials the local exchange (NXX) and additional digits to ring the telephone system extension. For example, DID number 926-5400 can directly ring extension 400. The caller does not have to rely on an attendant or receptionist to handle the call. Direct Inward Dialing is an efficient way to handle incoming calls, since callers can reach a large block of extensions over a relatively small number of DID lines. Direct Inward Dialing requires a T1 PCB and T1 DID service with a block (range) of DID numbers from the telco. For outgoing calls, DID lines operate identically to loop start lines. In addition to direct dialing of system extensions, DID provides: ❥ DID Dialed Number Translation The system provides a 100-entry DID Translation Table. This table gives you more flexibility when buying DID service from the telco. If you can't buy the exact block of numbers you need (e.g., 300-399), use the translation table to convert the digits received. For example, a translation table could convert digits 500-599 to extension numbers 300-399. By default, the system uses the last 2 digits of the received DID number to route to extensions 300-399. ❥ Flexible DID Service Compatibility You can program the system to be compatible with DID service of varying lengths (up to 8 digits). DID service is typically 3 or 4 digits long. With 4 digit service, the telco sends 4 digits to the system for translation. With 3 digit service, the telco sends 3 digits to the system for translation. Be sure to set up your system for compatibility with the provided telco service. Additionally, the system is compatible with Dial Pulse (DP) and DTMF DID signaling. DID lines can be either wink start or immediate start. By default, there are no DID lines programmed. ❥ DID Station Intercept DID Station Intercept automatically reroutes DID calls under certain conditions. There are 3 types of DID Station Intercept: - Busy/DND Intercept If a caller dials an extension that is busy or in Do Not Disturb, the system routes the call to the extension’s programmed DID Station Intercept destination. - Ring No Answer Intercept If a caller dials an extension that is unanswered, the system routes the call to the extension’s programmed DID Station Intercept destination. - Busy/DND and Ring No Answer Intercept If a caller dials an extension that is busy, in Do Not Disturb, or is unanswered, the system routes the call to the extension’s programmed DID Station Intercept destination. By default, DID Station Intercept is disabled for all extensions. ❥ Line Overflow If an incoming DID call is not answered at the destination extension or at the programmed intercept destination, it routes according to Line Overflow. This ensures that the call has an answering point in the system. Line Overflow typically routes to voice mail or to an extension. If the call is not answered at the overflow extension, it normally diverts to Key Ring. If Line Overflow is disabled, an unanswered DID call routes to Key Ring (and cannot overflow). By default, Line Overflow is disabled. Unanswered calls route to Key Ring (and cannot overflow). Directly dial system extensions from outside the system. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 35 Features ❥ Vacant Intercept If a caller misdials or dials an extension that does not exist, or there is a DID Translation Table error, Vacant Intercept handles the call routing. Vacant Intercept is always enabled. Since Line Overflow is disabled by default, Vacant Intercept by default routes to Key Ring (and cannot overflow). - If the telco doesn’t send any digits into the system, or If the digits sent by the telco don’t correspond to a DID Translation Table entry, or If the destination extension is out of service: The call follows the 3112-Termination routing for the line. This includes the settings for Day Termination, Day Overflow, Night Termination, and Night Overflow. The call is handled the same as an analog line and follows the normal system timers. - If the digits sent by the telco have a DID Translation Table entry with no corresponding destination programmed: No routing occurs and the caller hears busy tone. ❥ DID Camp-On DID Camp-On sets what happens to DID calls to busy extensions when you have Busy/DND Intercept disabled. With DID Camp-On enabled, a call to a busy extension camps-on to the extension. Without DID Camp-On, the caller to the busy extension just hears busy tone (or follows the intercept programming if enabled). By default, DID Camp-On is disabled. ❥ DID Routing to Voice Mail If a DID call is unanswered and is eventually routed to voice mail, it will route to the mailbox of the initial DID destination. This is true regardless of whether the call routed to voice mail via DID Line Overflow, Call Forwarding, or Extension Hunting. ANI/DNIS Support The system is compatible with telco's T1 Automatic Number Identification (ANI) and Dialed Number Information Service (DNIS) services. ANI/DNIS services can be provided on T1 loop start, ground start, and DID lines (but not E&M). ANI/DNIS Compatibility provides: ❥ Selectable Receive Format You can set up the system for compatibility with any combination of ANI, DNIS and Dialed Number (Address) data provided by the telco. ❥ Flexible Routing The system can route the incoming call based on the received DNIS data and the entries stored in the DID Translation Table. ❥ Caller ID The system can use the received ANI data to display the caller’s number on the called extension’s display. The ANI data can be up to 10 digits long. (Note that the T1 PCB can alternately receive normal FSK-based Caller ID if provided by the telco, but cannot route on that data.) Direct Inward Line A Direct Inward Line (DIL) is a line that rings an extension directly. Since DILs only ring one extension, employees always know which calls are for them. For example, a company operator can have a Direct Inward Line for International Sales Information. When outside callers dial the DIL’s phone number, the call rings the operator on the International Sales line key. The DIL does not ring other extensions. Assigning a DIL to an extension automatically provides immediate ringing and incoming access for the line, with no additional programming required. A DIL can ring: ❥ Extension numbers (including the attendant’s extension) ❥ Ring Group master numbers ❥ UCD Group master numbers (including the voice mail master number) A DIL lets an employee know which calls are just for them. 36 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Night Mode Control The extension to which the line is terminated controls the night mode of the line. For example, if extension 301 has line 1 assigned as a DIL, the user can press DND to switch line 1 to its night routing destination. Switching line 1 to night mode at extension 301 has no affect on the night mode of the system. This flexibility could allow a service dispatcher with several DILs to independently send lines to their night destinations without affecting the night mode of the entire system. Direct Line Access Direct Line Access lets an extension user access (seize) an individual line. After seizing the line, the user can dial any outside telephone number without restriction. An extension’s Class of Service allows or denies Direct Line Access. Direct Line Access is normally only provided for attendants, priority users and maintenance personnel. Direct Station Selection (DSS) If an extension’s Direct Station Selection (DSS) Keys are enabled, Feature Keys automatically become Direct Station Selection (DSS) keys when the user presses INTERCOM. Direct Station Selection provides an extension user with one-button Intercom access and Transfer to co-workers. Each DSS key also provides a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for the assigned co-worker. Priority users can access lines directly. Direct Line Access also lets maintenance personnel access and test individual lines. Quickly place and Transfer calls to co-workers, without having to look up or dial your coworker’s extension numbers. Important • If you enable an extension’s DSS Keys and leave the extension’s default Prime Line programming intact, the line keys automatically change to DSS keys when the user lifts the handset. When the DSS/BLF key is: The covered extension is: Off Idle On Busy or ringing Flashing fast In Do Not Disturb DSX Product Description Features ◆ 37 Features Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console The DSS Console (P/N 1090024 for black and P/N 090029 for white) gives a keyset user one-button access to extensions, lines, and selected features. This saves time for users that do a lot of call processing such as operators or dispatchers). The system allows you to install 4 DSS Consoles maximum per system. DSS Consoles use their own digital station port and do not require a separate power supply. In programming, you assign each installed console to an “owner” keyset. Each console can only have one owner. You can assign the following types of Feature Keys to a DSS Console.: DSS Consoles provide one-touch access to extensions, lines, and system features. • Account Code • Intercom Directory Dialing • Save Number Dialed • Call Coverage (immediate, delayed or no ring) • Line keys • Speed Dial, Personal • Call Forwarding • Message Center • Speed Dial, System • Group Call Pickup (immediate, delayed or no ring) • Night key • Split • Headset key • Page Zones • Voice Mail Conversation Record • Hotline • Park Orbit 38 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Default DSS Console Key Assignments The following illustration shows the default DSS Console key assignments. Directed Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup permits an extension user to intercept any type of call ringing another extension. With Directed Call Pickup, an extension user can pick up: ❥ Outside (Key Ring) calls ringing an extension ❥ Direct Inward Lines ❥ Transferred outside calls ❥ Ringing Intercom calls ❥ Recalls (e.g., Hold recall) ❥ Ring Group Calls (by dialing either the ringing extension’s number or the Ring Group master number) ❥ Ringing Call Coverage key calls Directed Call Pickup allows co-workers to answer each other’s calls. ANSWER TRANSFER 1093100 -3 RELEASE 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 ALL CALL Park 60 Park 61 Park 62 Park 63 Park 64 Park 65 Park 66 Night Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 DSX Product Description Features ◆ 39 Features ❥ Ringing Group Call Pickup calls ❥ Calls ringing the operator’s Operator Call key Directory Dialing Directory Dialing allows a display keyset user to select a co-worker or outside call from a list of names, rather than dialing the phone number. There are three types of directory Dialing: ❥ System (Company-Wide) Speed Dial names. ❥ Intercom names (including extension, Ring Group and UCD Group names). ❥ Personal Speed Dial names. Distinctive Ringing Distinctive Ringing allows the installer or keyset extension user to customize keyset ringing. This permits the user to determine the type of call just by listening to their keyset ring. Distinctive Ringing provides: ❥ Distinctive Ring Configuration at Each Keyset A keyset user can follow intuitive soft key menus to set up distinctive ringing for their phone. Their phone will even play back the new ring tones as the distinctive rings are being set up. ❥ Line Override (Distinctive Ringing by Line and Ringing Mode) Each line can have its own distinctive ringing for each ring mode (day, night, or delay). This allows a keyset user, for example, to easily differentiate between new ringing calls and calls that are ringing their phone after a delay. ❥ Extension Ring Override Each keyset extension can additionally override a line’s distinctive ringing with the extension’s own unique settings. Extension Ring Override helps identify ringing phones in large, open work areas. ❥ Key Ring Override A keyset extension can set up unique ringing for each of its Call Coverage, Group Call Pickup, and line keys. If a user needs to know what type of call is ringing their phone, Key Ring Override will help. ❥ Unique Ringing for UCD Groups and Ring Groups UCD Groups and Ring Groups can have their own distinctive rings. This allows a user to tell the difference between Intercom calls ringing their phone and UCD or Ring Group Calls. The Distinctive Ringing Hierarchy An extension’s Distinctive Ringing uses the following hierarchy: 1. Key Ring Override 2. Extension Ring Override 3. Line Override 4. Default ringing assigned by the system This means that Line Override will replace the default ringing assigned by the system. Extension Ring Override will in turn replace ringing set by Line Override. Finally, Key Ring Override will replace ringing set by Extension Override or ringing set by Line Override. Allows users to place Intercom or Speed Dial calls from a displayed list of names. Allows users to customize their telephone’s ringing so they’ll know when calls are just for them. 40 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Understanding Ring Types The Ring Types determine how different types of calls rings extensions. Each Ring Type sounds unique because it uses one of the 10 available ring tones. The first four Ring Types are assigned by default (see the table below). The last two (B and C) are unassigned by default but you can assign on your phone using Extension Override and Key Ring Override. When Multiple Calls Ring an Extension When multiple calls with different priorities are ringing an extension, the system prioritizes ringing according to the list below. All LEDs will flash as appropriate for the type of call, but the telephone will ring only for the highest priority call. 1. INTERCOM Key 2. Line Key (from lowest to highest) 3. Loop Key (from lowest to highest) Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb (DND) blocks incoming calls, Off-Hook Signaling and Paging announcements. An extension user can activate DND anytime while on a call or while their phone is idle. Once activated, incoming outside calls still flash the line keys. The user may use the phone in the normal manner for placing and processing calls. Do Not Disturb provides the following 4 DND options: (1) Incoming outside calls blocked (2) Incoming Intercom calls blocked (3) All incoming calls blocked The Ring Types Ring Type Call Type Intercom Intercom ringing This includes ringing Intercom calls, as well as calls ringing Extension Hunting groups, Call Coverage keys and the operator’s Call key. Ring Group Ring Group ringing Recall Recall ringing This includes Hold, Park or Transfer recall ringing. Ring “A” Type A ringing This includes line key, loop key, Transfer, and DIL ringing. (You can reassign types A, B, and C ringing in Extension Override and Key Ring Override below.) Ring “B” Type B ringing Not used (unassigned) by default. (You can reassign types A, B, and C ringing in Extension Override and Key Ring Override below.) Ring “C” Type C ringing Not used (unassigned) by default. (You can reassign types A, B, and C ringing in Extension Override and Key Ring Override below.) DND permits an extension user to work by the phone undisturbed by incoming calls and announcements. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 41 Features (0) Cancel Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb BLF for Hotline and Call Coverage Keys The following charts show the Do Not Disturb Busy Lamp Field flash rates for Hotline and Call Coverage keys. Do Not Disturb Options This DND option: Blocks these calls: (1) Incoming Outside Calls Blocked Ringing for outside calls, including: • Key Ring calls • Off Hook Ringing • Call Coverage Keys • Group Call Pickup keys • Transferred outside calls • Hold, Park, and Transfer recalls • Circular or Terminal Extension Hunting calls • DILs to the extension (if the extension is not the night mode termination) • DILs to a Ring Group or UCD Group master number (if the extension is in the group) (2) Incoming Intercom Calls Blocked • Incoming Intercom calls • Transferred Intercom calls • Paging announcements • Ringing from Intercom calls to the Ring Group master number (if the extension is in the group) • Extension hunting calls that normally ring the extension (3) All Incoming Calls Blocked • All calls blocked by Option 1 and Option 2. (0) Cancel Do Not Disturb • Option 0 cancels Do Not Disturb Hotline Busy Lamp Indications When the key is: The covered extension is: Off Idle or not installed On Busy or ringing Intercom call Medium Flash In DND for outside calls (option 1) Fast Flash In DND for Intercom calls (option 2) or All Calls (option 3) Call Coverage Key Busy Lamp Indications When the key is: The covered extension is: Off Idle or not installed On Busy Slow flash Ringing Medium flash In DND for outside calls (option 1) Fast Flash In DND for Intercom calls (option 2) or All Calls (option 3) 42 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Note: When transferring an outside call to an extension in DND, the Transfer will be blocked if the extension has enabled DND for all calls (type 3) or DND for outside calls (type 1). The Transfer will be allowed if the extension has enabled DND for Intercom calls (type 2). Do Not Disturb Override Do Not Disturb Override lets an extension user override another extension’s Do Not Disturb. This allows a priority employee (such as a supervisor or executive) to get through to a co-worker right away while the coworker’s phone is in Do Not Disturb. DND Override is available to all extensions that have DND Override set in their Class of Service. It is also available to any extension that has a Hotline key for a co-worker, even without the Class of Service option enabled. Door Box The Door Box (P/N 922450) is a self-contained analog Intercom unit typically used to monitor an entrance door. A visitor at the door can press the Door Box call button (like a door bell). The Door Box then sends chime tones or ringing to all extensions programmed to receive chimes. To answer the chime or ringing, the called extension user just lifts the handset. This lets the extension user talk to the visitor at the Door Box. The Door Box is convenient to have at a delivery entrance, for example. It is not necessary to have company personnel monitor the delivery entrance; they just answer the Door Box instead. ❥DSX-80/160 In DSX-80/160, a Door Box connects to an available Door Box port on a 2PGDAD Module (P/N 0891027). Each module supports up to two Door Boxes, with the maximum number of Door Boxes installed limited only by the availability of station ports to connect additional 2PGDAD Modules. ❥DSX-40 In DSX-40, the Door Box can connect to a 2PGDAD module or to one of the two “built-in” Door Box ports. As in DSX-80/160, the maximum number of Door Boxes installed is limited only by the availability of station ports to connect additional 2PGDAD Modules. Refer to Optional Equipment in the Hardware Manual that came with your system for more or installing the Analog Door Box. Door Box Relays Any keyset extension that receives Door Box chimes or ringing can control a control relay, which in turn typically enables an electric strike on an entrance door next to the Door Box. Door Box Alerts The system uses Ring Groups to control Door Box alerts. When a visitor at the door presses the Door Box call button, the Door Box will alert (chime or ring) all the extensions in the Ring Group to which the Door Box belongs. For example, if Door Box 309 and extensions 301 and 302 are in Ring Group 1, pressing the call button alerts 301 and 302. Extended Ringing Extended Ringing forces an unanswered call to ring a telephone an extended number of times before rerouting. This helps a users that cannot get to their phone quickly to pick up calls (such as a warehouse worker). Extended Ringing is available with the following features: Easily override a co-worker’s Do Not Disturb. Use a Door Box to remotely monitor an entrance door. Lets calls ring longer that usual to assist co-workers that can’t readily get to their phones. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 43 Features ❥ Direct Inward Line DILs ring for an extended period before routing to the overflow destination. ❥ Transfer Transferred outside calls ring for an extended period before recalling the transferring extension. Extension Hunting Extension Hunting routes calls to a predefined group of hunt group member extensions. A call rings in sequence through the hunt group until answered at a member extension. Extension Hunting is helpful, for example, for a group of co-workers that share responsibility for answering calls. Each call cycles through the group until an available member picks it up. There are three types of Extension Hunting: ❥ Circular Hunting ❥ Terminal Hunting ❥ Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Hunting Circular Hunting A Circular Hunting group consists of a group of extensions programmed into a Circular Hunting list. A call unanswered at a member extension rings the next extension in the programmed list. If unanswered, the call will continue to cycle through the hunt group. Depending on the hunt type (see below), Circular Hunting will occur for transferred outside calls, DILs to a hunt group member, and ringing Intercom calls. Hunting does not occur for Key Ring and Ring Group calls. Terminal Hunting A Terminal Hunting group consists of a group of extensions programmed into a Terminal Hunting list. A call unanswered at a member extension rings the next extension in the programmed list. The call will cycle through the group once, until it reaches the last extension in the list. Unlike Circular Hunting, the call will not cycle back to the top of the hunt list. Depending on the hunt type (see below), Terminal Hunting will occur for transferred outside calls, DILs to a hunt group member, and ringing Intercom calls. Hunting does not occur for Key Ring and Ring Group calls. Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Hunting Like Circular and Terminal Hunting, a UCD Hunting also consists of a group of extensions programmed into a hunt list. The system routes calls into a UCD Group according to the frequency of use of the member extensions. The first extension rung is the member that has been idle the longest. The last extension rung is the member that has been idle the shortest. Each member of the group is additionally associated with a UCD Master Extension Number. To activate UCD Hunting, an incoming call must route to the UCD Group master number. This is done by placing an Intercom call to the master number, transferring a call to the master number or setting up a DIL to the master number. When all members of the UCD Group are busy, the call can route to the programmed UCD Overflow destination. Extension Locking Extension Locking allows a keyset extension user to secure their phone when they leave the office. The user may want to do this if their phone has Toll Restriction and Class of Service options enabled that could be easily abused. While locked, the restrictions set up in Class of Service 15 and Toll Level 7 are in force at the extension. When the user returns, they just unlock their extension to return it to normal operation. Automatically route calls to co-workers that work closely together. When they leave the office, a keyset user can secure their phone to prevent unauthorized use. 44 ◆ Features DSX Product Description You’ll need to program the restrictions in Class of Service 15 and Toll Level 7 separately. Walking Class of Service and Extension Locking Walking Class of Service overrides Extension Locking. For example: ❥ Extension 301 is permitted by their Class of Service and Toll Restriction to use Paging and place long distance calls. ❥ Extension 306 locks their extension. While locked, Class of Service 15 prevents Paging and Toll Level 7 prevents long distance calls. These features are no longer available at extension 306. ❥ The extension 301 user goes to extension 306 and implements Walking Class of Service. ❥ The extension 301 user can then use 306 to make long distance calls and Page (even though 306 was locked to prevent those features). Feature Keys Each keyset has Feature Keys. These Feature Keys simplify placing calls, answering calls and using certain features. You can customize the function of any keyset’s Feature Keys from the system program and the User Programmable Features. The 22-Button Standard and Display Telephones feature 12 Feature Keys. The 34-Button Display Telephone features 24 Feature Keys. The 34-Button Super Display Telephone also features 24 Feature Keys. Feature Keys simplify feature operation. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 45 Features You can assign the following types of Feature Keys to an extension. Flash Flash allows an extension user to access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting line loop current. Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever features the connected telco or PBX offers. You must set the Flash parameters for compatibility with the connected telco. Flexible Numbering Plan The system’s Flexible Numbering Plan allows you to change the digits users dial to reach the attendant, other co-worker’s, outside lines, UCD Groups, and Ring Groups. The following chart shows the areas of the system number plan you can change. Forced Line Disconnect Forced Line Disconnect allows an extension user to disconnect (release) another extension’s active outside call. Forced Line Disconnect lets a user access a busy line in an emergency, when no other lines are available. Maintenance technicians can also use Forced Line Disconnect to release a line on which there is no • Account Code • Intercom Directory Dialing • Park Orbit • Call Coverage (immediate, delayed or no ring) • Line keys • Reverse Voice Over • Call Forwarding • Message Center • Save Number Dialed • Call Timer • Loop Key, Fixed • Speed Dial, Personal • Group Call Pickup (immediate, delayed or no ring) • Loop Key, Switched • Speed Dial, System • Headset key • Night key • Split • Hotline • Page Zones • Voice Mail Conversation Record Extension users can access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting line loop current. Change the digits users dial for co-workers and other features. For this feature: You can change the digits a user dials to: These digits are normally: Attendant Position (page 23) Reach the system operator(s) 0 or 01-04 Central Office Calls, Placing (page 31) Access a Line Group 90-98 Direct Line Access (page 36) Directly access a line 101-164 Extension Hunting (page 43) Reach a UCD Group master number 700-707 Group Ring (page 46) Reach a a Ring Group master number 600-607 Intercom (page 51) Call a co-worker over the Intercom 300-427 Disconnect a co-worker’s outside call in an emergency. 46 ◆ Features DSX Product Description conversation. This can happen if a line does not properly disconnect when the outside party hangs up. Group Call Pickup Group Call Pickup allows an extension user to answer a call ringing an extension in their assigned Pickup Group. This permits co-workers in the same Pickup Group to easily answer each other’s ringing calls. The user can intercept the ringing call by dialing a code or pressing a programmed Group Call Pickup key. The system has a maximum of eight Pickup Groups, with an unlimited number of extensions in each group. However, an extension can be a member of only one pickup group. Group Call Pickup can answer the following types of calls: ❥ Ringing Intercom calls ❥ Transferred calls ❥ Direct Inward Lines ❥ Calls on lines assigned to the Pickup Group To simplify picking up calls, an extension can have Feature Keys assigned as Group Call Pickup keys. There are three types of Group Call Pickup keys: immediate ring, no ring (lamp only), or delayed ring. Group Listen Group Listen permits a keyset user to talk on the handset and have their caller’s voice broadcast over the telephone speaker. This lets the keyset user’s co-workers listen to the conversation. Group Listen turns off the keyset’s Handsfree microphone so the caller does not hear the co-worker’s voices during a Group Listen. When a keyset user sets up Group Listen, they hear their caller’s voice over the telephone speaker as well as their handset. Group Ring Group Ring allows you to arrange extensions into Ring Groups for answering calls. When a call comes into the Ring Group master number, all extensions in the group ring simultaneously. Any user in the Ring Group can answer the call just by lifting the handset. The ringing call can be: ❥ A Direct Inward Line to the Ring Group (i.e., terminated to the Ring Group master number). ❥ An outside call transferred to the Ring Group master number. ❥ An intercom call to the Ring Group master number. The system provides up to 8 Ring Groups (1-8). The Ring Group master numbers are predefined as 600-607, but can be any valid extension number not already in use. An unanswered DIL to the Ring Group master number can be picked up by the Ring Group Mailbox. CAUTION Forced Line Disconnect abruptly terminates the active call on the line. Only use this feature in an emergency and when no other lines are available. Easily answer a call ringing your Pickup Group, even if you don’t know which extension is ringing. Use Group Listen to talk to an important client or customer and have your co-workers listen in on the meeting. Use Group Ring to call a group of co-worker’s simultaneously. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 47 Features Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback Handsfree Handsfree allows a keyset user to process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone (instead of the handset). Handsfree is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand to pick up the handset. For example, a terminal operator could continue to enter data with both hands while talking on the phone. Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by speaking toward the phone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand to pick up the handset. Incoming Intercom calls alert with two beeps if the extension has Handsfree Answerback — a single beep if it does not. Forced Intercom Ringing causes an Intercom call to ring the destination extension. You can enable Forced Intercom Ringing system-wide (for all extensions), or a user can dial a code to have their Intercom call ring the destination. Headset Compatibility A keyset user can utilize a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. Like using Handsfree, using the headset frees up the user’s hands for other work. However, the headset provides privacy not available from Handsfree. Headset Compatibility also provides the following features. (Note that while an extension is in the Headset mode, the system ignores all hookswitch depressions.) ❥ Background Music If programmed and connected, Background Music will broadcast over the telephone speaker while the extension is in the Headset mode. ❥ Central Office Calls, Answering An extension user in the Headset mode can press Volume Up and Volume Down to control the volume of any call ringing their phone. ❥ Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback An extension in the Headset mode can receive normal voice-announced Intercom calls, depending on system programming. The extension user can respond to the voice-announced call by speaking toward the phone (just like non-headset extensions). To answer the voice-announced call in the headset, the user just presses SPEAKER after hearing the voice-announcement. ❥ Microphone Mute While on a headset call, the extension user can press MUTE to mute (i.e., turn off) the headset microphone. While responding to an Intercom call using Handsfree Answerback, pressing MUTE mutes the Handsfree microphone. ❥ Off-Hook Signaling Outside Calls Depending on system programming, an extension in the headset mode can receive either Camp-On beeps or Off-Hook Ringing for incoming outside calls (just like non-headset extensions). Intercom Calls Depending on system programming, an extension in the headset mode can receive either Camp-On beeps or Voice Over announcements from a co-worker (just like non-headset extensions). - Talk over the phone Handsfree, using the built-in speaker and microphone. - With Handsfree Answerback, answer an Intercom call by just speaking toward your phone. Have the privacy of a handset call without having to hold the handset. 48 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Hotline Calls Depending on system programming, an extension in the headset mode can receive either Camp-On beeps or Voice Over announcements from their Hotline partner. Paging Internal Paging announcements broadcast over the telephone speaker while the extension is in the Headset mode. Transfer Screened and unscreened transfers work just like non-headset extensions. For example, if a headset extension user presses SPEAKER to answer a screened transfer, the call will connect to their headset when the transferring party hangs up. Note that Handsfree Transfers always connect to the headset extension’s headset, not speakerphone. Volume Control While on a headset call, the extension user can press Volume Up and Volume Down to adjust the receive volume in the headset. Headset Key A keyset user can have a Feature Key on their telephone or DSS Console assigned as a Headset key. The user presses the key to enable or disable the headset mode, as an alternative to using the #HL User Programmable Feature. The key lights while the extension is in the Headset mode, and is off while the Headset mode is disabled. If an extension user is on a call, pressing the Headset key automatically switches the active call to the headset. Pressing the Headset key again switches the call back to Handsfree. Off-Hook Signaling and Headsets Outside Calls (transfers and DILs) If the extension is set up to receive Camp-On tones for waiting (transferred) outside calls, the user will hear the Camp-On tones in their headset. They will also hear Camp-On tones in their headset for a waiting Direct Inward Line (DIL). The extension will not, however, receive Camp-On tones for Key Ring calls ringing the phone while it is in the headset mode. An extension in the headset mode will not hear Off-Hook Ringing. Intercom Calls If the extension is set up to receive Camp-On tones for waiting Intercom calls, the user will hear tones in their headset when a co-worker dials 2 to wait in line. Hold Hold lets an extension user put a call in a temporary waiting state. The caller on Hold hears silence or Music on Hold, not conversation in the extension user’s work area. While the call waits on Hold, the extension user may process calls or use a system feature. Outside calls left on Hold too long recall the extension that placed them on Hold. If the recall is unanswered, the call diverts to Key Ring. There are four types of Hold: System (Regular) Hold With System Hold, an outside call a user places on Hold flashes the line key (if programmed) at all other keysets. Any keyset user with the flashing line key can pick up the call. Exclusive Hold When a user places a call on Exclusive Hold, only that user can pick up the call from Hold. The line appears busy to all other keysets that have a key for the line. Exclusive Hold is important if the user doesn’t want a co-worker picking up their call on Hold. Have a call wait on Hold, then pick it up to continue the conversation. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 49 Features Automatic Hold Automatic Hold allows a user to be on an outside call, activate a feature, and automatically place the call on Hold without first pressing the HOLD key. The system places a call on Hold automatically when the user presses CONF, INTERCOM, or a Hotline key. Automatic Hold optionally allows a user, busy on an outside call, to press another line key or a Call Coverage Key to automatically put their initial call on Hold. Intercom Hold A user can place an Intercom call on Hold. The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at any other extension. There is no Hold Recall for Intercom calls. Distinctive Flash Rate on Recall System Hold and Exclusive Hold recall feature a distinctive flash rate for line keys (see the chart below). This allows the keyset extension user to easily differentiate new calls that are ringing from held calls that are recalling. Distinctive Flash Rate on Recall For this type of call: You see this flash rate: System Hold Exclusive Hold Call that you placed on Hold Single Wink On (green) Double Wink On (green) Call that you initially placed on Hold recalling your phone Double Wink On (green) Double Wink On (green) Call a co-worker placed on Hold at their extension Single Wink On (red) None (On red) Call a co-worker initially placed on Hold recalling your phone Double Wink On (red) Double Wink On (red) 50 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Hold Recall Display The Hold recall display identifies: ❥ The type of call recalling the extension. ❥ The extension which initially placed the call on Hold. The Hold recall displays occurs as the call is ringing the extension that initially placed it on Hold, and after the call diverts to Key Ring. Hotline Hotline gives a keyset user with a programmed Hotline key one-button calling and Transfer to another extension (the Hotline partner). Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together. The Hotline partners can call or Transfer calls to each other just by pressing a single key. In addition, the Hotline key shows the status of the partner’s extension: Hotline Automatic Transfer With Hotline Automatic Transfer, the extension can Transfer their call to a co-worker just by pressing their Hotline key and hanging up. Without Hotline Automatic Transfer, the user must press TRANSFER before pressing the Hotline key. If the user frequently uses their Hotline key for one-button Transfer to co-workers, Hotline Automatic Transfer is recommended. If the user prefers to consult with their Hotline partner rather than Transfer, disabling Hotline Automatic Transfer would be helpful. Pressing a Hotline key can Transfer a call to an uninstalled extension’s mailbox (if the mailbox is enabled). Interactive Soft Keys Interactive Soft Keys provide intuitive feature access. It is no longer necessary to remember feature codes to access the telephone’s advanced features because the function of the soft keys change as the user process calls. For example, while on an outside call a display keyset user can press the PARK soft key to Park their call in orbit. Hotline provides partner extensions with one-button calling and Transfer. Hotline Busy Lamp Indications When the key is: The partner extension is: Off Idle or not installed On Busy or ringing1 Medium Flash Partner extension is in DND for outside calls (option 1). Fast Flash Partner extension is in DND for Intercom calls (option 2) or All Calls (option 3). 1 Ringing Intercom and Group Ring calls light the Hotline key. DILs, Key Ring calls and transferred calls do not. Use advanced features just by pressing a soft key, without remembering feature codes. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 51 Features Intercom Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions. This provides the system with complete internal calling capability. Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by speaking toward the phone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand to pick up the handset. Incoming Intercom calls alert with two beeps if the extension has Handsfree Answerback — a single beep if it does not. Forced Intercom Ringing causes an Intercom call to ring the destination extension. You can enable Forced Intercom Ringing system-wide (for all extensions), or a user can dial a code to have their Intercom call ring the destination. For more on setting up Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing, see Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback (page 47) for more. Key Ring A Key Ring line rings an extension according to the settings in system programming. Multiple extensions can be enabled to ring immediately or after a programmed delay for each incoming line call. In addition, under certain conditions other types of outside calls divert to Key Ring if unanswered. The following conditions also initiate Key Ring: ❥ Direct Inward Line An unanswered DIL diverts to Key Ring if unanswered at the extension to which it is terminated. ❥ Hold Calls left on Hold too long recall the extensions that initially placed them on Hold. If still unanswered, they divert to Key Ring. ❥ Park Calls parked in orbit recall the extension that initially parked them. If unanswered, the call diverts to Key Ring. ❥ Transfer An unanswered Transfer recalls the extension that initially transferred it. If still unanswered, the line diverts to Key Ring. Language Selection Language Selection provides telephone displays for soft keys and system programming in English and Spanish. You can select the language for each extension in system programming, or the extension user can choose their language via the soft keys. Language Selection allows the system to easily accommodate bilingual installations (English and Spanish). The telephone user can have their telephone display the language with which they are most comfortable. Use Intercom to call any co-worker. So they are not forgotten, unanswered calls automatically ring co-worker’s extensions. Set up a telephone to show displays and soft keys in English or Spanish. 52 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Last Number Redial Last Number Redial allows an extension user to quickly redial the last outside number dialed. For example, a user may quickly recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits. Last Number Redial saves in system memory the last 20 digits a user dials. The number can be any combination of digits 0-9, # and *. The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same line as for the initial call. However, if that line is busy and is part of a Line Group, Last Number Redial will automatically select the next line in the group. The user can also preselect a specific line if desired. Enhanced Last Number Redial If enabled, Enhanced Last Number Redial allows the extension user to select from the last 5 outside numbers dialed. When the user places an outside call, the number dialed is stored in the Enhanced Last Number Redial buffer. This buffer saves the 5 most recent numbers (including Speed Dial calls), with the most recent call at the top of the buffer and the oldest number at the bottom of the buffer. Old calls get pushed off the bottom of the buffer to make room for new calls at the top. If a user dials a number that is already stored in the buffer, the system inserts the number at the top of the buffer and deletes the duplicate entry. The numbers stored in the Enhanced Last Number Redial buffer are retained if the system resets or is powered down. Line Group Routing With Line Group Routing enabled, an extension user can just press INTERCOM and dial 9 to place an outside call. Line Group Routing automatically selects the first available line in the extension’s programmed “dial 9” Line Group. This simplifies placing calls in systems that have a lot of lines for outgoing calls. Rather than press one of many line keys, the user just dials 9 instead. Line Groups Extension users can optionally dial Line Group access codes 90-98 to select an available line in the group for outgoing calls. This is helpful in applications that have different services arranged into Line Groups. For example, dialing 90 could access a group of DDD lines for local calls, and dialing 91 could access a group of WATS lines for long distance calls. Note that systems with Line Group Routing (page 52) enabled cannot also dial Line Group access codes 90-98. When a user dials a Line Group access code (90-98), the system selects the lowest number in the group that is available. If that line is busy, it automatically selects the next highest line. If all lines in the group are busy, the user can optionally queue for a line to become free. See Line Queuing / Line Callback (page 53) for more. Quickly redial the last number dialed. Dial a single code to place a call over the first available line in a Line Group. Dial codes to access Line Groups for outgoing calls. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 53 Features Line Keys A line key provides an extension user with one-button access to outside lines. The extension user just presses a line key to place or answer a call on the line. There is no need to dial codes to access or intercept outside calls. In addition, a line key provides a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for the line to which it is assigned (see the table below). Answering Priority When multiple calls ring an extension simultaneously, the system services the ringing calls in the following order: 1. Ringing Intercom call 2. Line or loop key (from lowest to highest) - This option does not restrict loop keys. Line Queuing / Line Callback Line Queuing Line Queueing permits an extension user to queue (wait in line) on hook for a busy line or Line Group to become free. The system connects the queued extension as soon as the line is available. The user does not have to manually retry the line later. Line Callback After queuing for a line, the extension user just hangs up to convert the Line Queue into a Line Callback. When the line becomes free, the system automatically recalls the extension. As soon as the extension user answers the callback ring, the system connects the extension to the line. An extension user can leave a Line Callback for many lines. The system processes the callbacks as the lines become free. In addition, many extensions can leave a Line Callback for the same line. The system processes the Callbacks on a first-in/first-out (FIFO) basis. Press a line key for one-touch access to an outside line. Line Key BLF Indications When the key is: The line is: Off Idle or not installed On (red) In use or on Exclusive Hold at a co-worker’s extension On (green) In use at your extension Wink On (red) On System Hold at a co-worker’s extension Wink On (green) On System Hold at your extension Double Wink On (green) On Exclusive Hold or recalling your extension Slow Flash (red) Ringing into the system Slow Flash (green) Ringing or recalling directly to your extension - When all lines are busy, Line Queuing lets a user wait in line for a line to become free. - Line Callback will automatically call the user back when a line is available. 54 ◆ Features DSX Product Description If an extension user leaves a Line Callback request and then fails to answer the callback ring, the system cancels the Callback. Line Queuing Priority Selected extensions can have Line Queuing Priority enabled in their Class of Service. If more than one extension queues or leaves a Callback for a busy line, the system services the extension with Line Queuing Priority first. If more than one extension with priority is queued for the same busy line, the system services the priority extensions on a first-in/first-out (FIFO) basis. - This option does not restrict Line Callback. Loop Keys Loop keys are Feature Keys that simplify the way extension users place and answer outside calls. There are two types of loop keys: Switched Loop keys and Fixed Loop keys. Switched Loop Keys For incoming calls, Switched Loop keys provide an appearance for any line not assigned to a line key for which the extension has access and ringing. Switched Loop keys insure that there is a visual appearance for lines that do not ring an extension’s line keys. For outgoing calls, Switched Loop keys provide convenient access to Line Groups. For example, instead of pressing INTERCOM and dialing 90 for Line Group 90, the user can just press the Switched Loop key and dial 0 instead. Fixed Loop Keys For outgoing calls, a Fixed Loop key is a loop key assigned to a specific Line Group. When the extension user presses the Fixed Loop key for an outgoing call, they get the first line in the group assigned to the key. For incoming calls, the Fixed Loop key works just like a Switched Loop key. It provides an appearance for any line not assigned to a line key for which the extension has access and ringing. Answering Priority When multiple calls ring an extension simultaneously, the system services the ringing calls in the following order: 1. Ringing Intercom call 2. Line or loop key (from lowest to highest) Meet-Me Conference With Meet-Me Conference, an extension user can set up a telephone meeting with their co-workers. Each party joins the Conference by dialing a Meet Me Conference code. Meet Me Conference lets extension users have a telephone meeting — without leaving the office. Users must join the meeting within the Meet-Me Conference interval. The system has two Meet-Me Conference codes (#11 and #12). After a Meet-Me Conference is set up and the Meet-Me Conference interval expires, the code used becomes available for a new meeting. Since Meet- Me Conference is a type of Conference, the system’s Conference capacity determines: ❥ The number of users that can join a Meet-Me Conference, and ❥ The number of simultaneous conferences. Loop keys simplify answering and placing calls. Set up a multiple-party telephone conversation with your co-workers. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 55 Features The following table shows the Conference capacities: The system’s 32 Conference circuits are dynamically allocated as users request them. Message Waiting An extension user can leave a Message Waiting indication at a busy or unanswered extension requesting a return call. The indication is a flashing V-MAIL key and Ring/Message lamp at the called extension. Answering the Message Waiting automatically calls the extension which left the indication. Message Waiting ensures that a user will not have to recall an unanswered extension. It also ensures that a user will not miss calls when their extension is busy or unattended. An extension user can leave Messages Waiting at any number of extensions. Also, any number of extensions can leave a Message Waiting at the same extension. If an extension has multiple messages waiting, the user can scroll through their Messages Waiting and select a co-worker to call back. Microphone Mute Microphone Mute lets a keyset user turn off their phone’s handset or Handsfree microphone at any time. While the extension is on-hook, Microphone Mute mutes the Handsfree microphone. While off-hook, Microphone Mute mutes the handset microphone. Once activated, Microphone Mute prevents the caller from hearing conversations in the user’s work area. The user can turn off the Handsfree or handset microphone while their telephone is idle, busy on a call, in DND or while an outside call is ringing. Answering a call automatically cancels Microphone Mute. While an extension has their microphone muted, an incoming voice-announced Intercom call announces with a single beep (splash tone). Handsfree Reply Soft Key Display keyset users can press their HF Reply (Hfrp) soft key to turn off their telephone’s Handsfree microphone for incoming Intercom calls. Description Capacity Conference circuits 32 Maximum simultaneous users in Conference (total of all Conferences system-wide) 32 Maximum simultaneous conferences 8 Maximum parties in any one Conference (lines and/or extensions) 8 For systems without voice mail, leave a Message Waiting request for a return call. Talk to a co-worker in your office without your caller hearing the conversation. 56 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Monitor / Silent Monitor Monitor lets an extension user listen to the conversation at a busy extension. To implement Monitor, an extension user just calls a busy extension and dials the Monitor code. The busy extension and their caller have no indication of the intrusion. There are no tones heard and there is no visual indication that monitoring is occurring. For example, Monitor could help the supervisor of a service department. The department supervisor could listen to the questions that callers ask without disturbing the service call. Music on Hold Music on Hold (MOH) plays music to calls on Hold, parked calls, and transferred calls. The music lets the caller know that their call is waiting, not forgotten. Without Music on Hold, the system provides silence to these types of calls. Music on Hold is available from one of four sources: two internal beep tones and two audio input minijacks (which in turn connect to a customer-provided external music source. With Music on Hold enabled, transferred callers can optionally listen to ringback or MOH while their call waits at the transfer destination. Names for Extensions and Lines Extensions and lines can have names instead of just circuit numbers. These names show on a keyset’s display when the user places or answers calls. Extension and line names make it easier to identify callers. The user does not have to refer to a directory when processing calls. Extension and line names can consist of upper and lower case letters, spaces and punctuation, and can be up to 18 characters long. Night Service / Night Ring Night Service redirects outside calls to their night mode destination. Typically, the attendant or supervisor activates Night Service after normal working hours, when most employees are unavailable to answer calls. Lines can ring extensions directly at Night, providing specific answering points for Night Service calls. (For example, you can program lines to ring the security station at night.) To have outside lines ring the External Paging system (which users can answer by dialing a code), see Outside Call Ringing Over External Page (page 58). To have the ringing call also activate the system relay, see Page Relay Control (page 58). Night Service Keys The night mode status of the system is controlled by the following 3 types of keys: ❥ Night Key Assigned as a System Night Key This type of key controls the night mode status of all Key Ring lines as well as all lines that are Direct Inward Lines (DILs) to Ring Group master numbers. The entry is 18 + CLEAR. Monitor a co-worker’s phone conversation without them knowing you are on the phone. CAUTION Monitor provides no warning tones prior to intrusion. Monitor may be interpreted as an invasion of privacy. Callers can listen to music while waiting for their call to go through. Names help identify lines and extensions. Use Night Service to reroute calls after hours. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 57 Features ❥ Night Key Assigned as a UCD Night Key This type of key controls the night mode status of all lines terminated to UCD Group master numbers. It has no affect on Key Ring lines or lines terminated to Ring Group master numbers. The entry is 18 + UCD Group master number.1 ❥ An Extension’s DND Key The DND key controls the night mode status of all lines that are DILs to the extension. In the day, the line rings the extension. When the user presses DND, the DILs ring their programmed night mode destinations. Off-Hook Signaling When a user is busy on a call, Off-Hook Signaling indicates that another caller is trying to get through. Off-Hook Signaling helps important callers get through, without waiting in line for the called extension to become free. After the user hears the off-hook signal, they can use other system features (such as Hold or Park) to process their active call and then answer the waiting call. Off-Hook Signaling for Outside Calls While a keyset user is on a call, Off-Hook Signaling for outside calls can be: ❥ While on a handset call, - A flashing green Ring/Message lamp - A flashing red or green line/loop key - Muted off-hook ringing (While Off-Hook Signaling ringing is occurring, use Volume Up and Volume Down to adjust the volume of ringing.) ❥ While on a handset or Handsfree call, - A flashing green line/loop key - Camp-On tones The following chart shows when the two types of Off-Hook Signaling occur. Note that Camp-On tones occur for an extension when they are the exclusive recipient of the call (such as a DIL). Off-Hook Signaling for Intercom Calls While an extension user is on a handset or Handsfree call, they can receive Camp-On tones from a co-worker that called them and dialed 2 to Camp-On. Turn to Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 28) for more on how to set this up. Off-hook ringing for Intercom calls is not available. 1. Do not use this option if you want lines to overflow to voice mail. See Key Ring (page 51) instead. Off-Hook Signaling helps important callers get through. Off-Hook Ringing Camp-On Tones Key Ring Yes No Transferred Outside Call Yes Yes Direct Inward Line Yes Yes Transfer from Voice Mail (UTRF) Yes Yes Call Coverage Key Yes No Group Call Pickup Key Yes No 58 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Off-Hook Signaling for Hotline Calls While an extension is busy on a handset call, the system provides unique handling of Off-Hook Signaling for calls from their Hotline partner. This unique handling occurs when the Hotline partner calls the extension by first pressing their Hotline key. The Off-Hook Signaling can be Camp-On tones or Voice Over. The default is Camp-On tones. Paging Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other keyset users and to external Paging speakers. Paging allows a user to locate a co-worker or make an announcement without calling each extension individually. There are two types of Paging: Internal Paging and External Paging. Internal Paging Internal Paging allows extension users to broadcast announcements into 7 internal Paging Zones and All Call (all zone). When a user makes a zone page, the announcement broadcasts to all extensions assigned to the specified zone. If the user makes an All Call announcement, the announcement simultaneously broadcasts to extensions in all zones. All Call Paging automatically overrides any zone pages already in progress. A system timer can optionally limit the duration of Paging announcements. To simplify Paging access, a keyset can have Feature Keys assigned as Page keys. External Paging When a user pages into Internal All Call Page or Internal page Zone 1, the system simultaneously broadcasts the announcement into the External Paging Zone. Refer to the system’s Hardware Manual for installation details. Page Relay Control Page Relay Control allows an announcement broadcast into a Paging zone to activate a system relay. This relay is typically used to activate a customer-provided Paging amplifier. You can assign these relays for Door Box strike control or Page Relay Control, but not both. If the system relay is programmed for Page Relay Control, and an extension or line is set up to ring over External Paging, the relay will activate when the extension or line rings. Outside Call Ringing Over External Page Line ringing can optionally broadcast over External Paging speakers. For each line, the Paging speakers can broadcast ringing for all calls ringing the line, for calls ringing only at night, or for delay ring calls. While a line rings External Paging, any extension user can dial a code (INTERCOM + *0) to pick up the call. If the system relay is programmed for Page Relay Control, and the line is set up to ring over External Paging, the relay will activate when the line rings. Use Paging to broadcast announcements or quickly locate co-workers. Paging Key Busy Lamp Indications When the key is: The zone is: Off Idle On (red) A co-worker is Paging into the assigned zone On (green) The extension user is Paging into the assigned zone. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 59 Features If Door Box chimes, ringing, and Background Music are all programmed to output over External Paging, the system uses the following broadcast priority: ❥ Paging ❥ Door Box chimes ❥ Ringing ❥ Background Music Note that External Paging can broadcast either extension ringing or line ringing, not both. In addition, External Paging requires additional customer-provided equipment. Refer to the Hardware Manual that came with your system for more. Intercom Ring Over External Page An extension’s ringing can optionally broadcast over External Paging. If enabled, any type of call that rings the extension will broadcast over the Paging speakers. While an Intercom call rings External Paging, any extension user can dial a code (INTERCOM + *0) to pick up the call. If the system relay is programmed for Page Relay Control, and an extension is set up to ring over External Paging, the relay will activate when the extension rings. Door Chime Over External Page Door Box chimes can optionally broadcast over External Paging. While Door Box chimes broadcast over External Paging, any extension user can dial a code (INTERCOM + *0) to answer the Door Box. After answering, a keyset user can press a soft key or FLASH to control the Door Box relay. Background Music Over External Page Background Music (BGM) can optionally play over the External Paging speakers while Paging is idle. BGM will automatically turn off while Paging, ringing or Door Box chimes broadcast from the external zone, and restart when the external zone again becomes idle. Ring Over Page Volume Adjustment You can adjust the volume of ringing over the External Paging system. There are three volume adjustments: low (5), medium (6), and high (4). This adjustment does not affect the volume of Background Music or Door Chimes. Park Park places an outside call in a waiting state (called a Park Orbit) so that an extension user may pick it up. There are two types of Park: System and Personal. Use System Park when you want to have the call wait in one of 10 system orbits (60-69). Personal Park allows you to Park a call at an extension so a co-worker can pick it up. After parking a call, a user can Page the person receiving the call and hang up. The paged party dials a code or presses a programmed System Park key to pick up the call. Many calls can be parked at the same extension, and are retrieved in LIFO (last-in, first-out) order. A call parked in System Park Orbit for too long will recall the extension that initially parked it. The recall for System Park Orbits 68 and 69 is permanently fixed at 5 minutes. If the recall remains unanswered, the call diverts to Key Ring. A call parked in Personal Park Orbit for too long will initially recall to the extension at which it is parked. If unanswered there, it recalls to the extension that parked the call. If still unanswered, it diverts to Key Ring. Park a call in orbit so a co-worker can pick it up. With Park, it is not necessary to locate a person to handle their calls. 60 ◆ Features DSX Product Description When an extension has System Park keys, the keys provide a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for the orbit assigned to the key. Distinctive Flash Rate on Recall Park recall features a distinctive flash rate for line keys (see the chart below). This allows the keyset extension user to easily differentiate new calls that are ringing from Parked calls that are recalling. Personal Park Orbit Recall Display The Personal Park Orbit recall display shows: ❥ On all extensions that are ringing with the recall: - The type of recall (i.e., Personal Park). ❥ On the extension at which the call is parked (while it is ringing): - The extension which initially parked the call. ❥ On all other extensions as they are ringing with the recall: - The extension at which the call was initially parked. The Personal Park Orbit recall display occurs: ❥ At the extension which initially received the Personal Park. ❥ At the extension which initially parked the call. ❥ At all other extensions after the call diverts to Key Ring. System Park Orbit Recall Display The System Park Orbit recall display shows: ❥ The orbit from which the call is recalling (e.g., 60). ❥ The extension that initially parked the call (e.g., 301). The System Park Orbit recall display occurs as the call is ringing the extension that initially parked it, and after the call diverts to Key Ring. Park Key Busy Lamp Indications When the key is: The Park orbit is: Off Idle On (red) A co-worker has parked a call in the orbit assigned to the key. Single wink on (green) The extension user has parked a call in the orbit assigned to the key. Distinctive Flash Rate on Park Recall For this type of call: You see this flash rate: Call that you Parked Double Wink On (green) Call that you initially Parked recalling your phone Double Wink On (green) Call Parked by a co-worker On (red) Call initially Parked by a co-worker that is recalling your phone Double Wink On (red) DSX Product Description Features ◆ 61 Features PBX / Centrex Compatibility PBX/Centrex Access Codes PBX Access Codes are the digits PBX extension users must dial to obtain outside lines. When the DSX is installed behind a PBX, users must dial these codes before the digits for their outside call. For example, if the PBX access code is 98, and the DSX user wants to reach 203-926-5400, they must dial 98-1-203-926- 5400. Normally, DSX Toll Restriction and Forced Account Codes are applied to the digits dialed after the PBX Access Code. This is because any call dialed without the PBX access code is an internal PBX call, and usually won’t require the restrictions imposed by Forced Account Codes and Toll Restriction. PC Program (System Administrator) The PC Program is a WindowsTM-based application you can use for programming the telephone system and maintaining site databases, instead of using the conventional telephone programming. The PC Program provides: ● On-Line Programming (Direct Connection) With the PC connected to the telephone system’s serial USB, or Ethernet port, you can make immediate changes to the telephone system programming. While connected, the PC Program also allows you to save your new data to a file on the PC hard disk, or upload a “template” database from your PC to the system. ● Remote Programming Using an IP or modem connection between your PC and the remote system, you can customize a customer’s system without leaving your office. Specify what is required for IP and modem connections. The DSX provides unique features when connected to a PBX or Centrex. Use your PC or laptop to program the system remotely or while on-site. 62 ◆ Features DSX Product Description ● Off-Line Programming With Off-Line Programming, the PC Program allows you to set up a database on your PC off line, connect to the telephone system, and upload the entire custom configuration. ● Database Save and Restore Use the PC Program to save a site’s data to your PC hard disk. You can easily restore the saved data later on, if required. Prime Line Preference Prime Line Preference allows an extension user to place or answer a call by just lifting the handset. The user does not have to press a line key, loop key, or the INTERCOM key first. This simplifies handling calls. In programming, you designate a line key, loop key, the INTERCOM key, a line, or a Line Group as the extension’s Prime Line. With a line key, loop key, line, or Line Group, the associated line (or lines) becomes your Prime Line. With the INTERCOM key, you get Intercom dial tone when you lift the handset. Any number of extensions can have the same Prime Line assignment. There are two types of Prime Line Preference: Idle Prime Line and Intercom Prime Line. Idle Prime Line Idle Prime Line lets a user place or answer a Prime Line call by just lifting the handset. An extension’s Idle Prime Line can be any line or Line Group, regardless of whether the extension has a line or loop key for the line or group. Idle Prime Line to any line or Line Group is also available at single line telephones. Intercom Prime Line With Intercom Prime Line, an idle extension user hears Intercom dial tone whenever they lift the handset or press SPEAKER. Intercom Prime Line may help the extension user that most often uses Intercom functions or calls co-workers. If an extension’s Busy Lamp Field is disabled (which is the default), the Feature Keys do not go into the DSS mode when the user lifts the handset. Prime Line vs. Ringing Line Preference Ringing Line Preference has priority over Prime Line. For example, an extension with Ringing Line Preference will answer a ringing line, not get dial tone on their Prime Line. In addition, a Ringing Prime Line will have priority over any other ringing line. The seize priority is as follows: • Ringing Prime Line • Ringing non-Prime Line • Prime Line Privacy An extension with Privacy blocks incoming Barge In attempts and Call Waiting (Camp-On) signals. Privacy helps extension users that don’t want their conversations interrupted. Note that if an extension with Privacy enabled is on a call with an extension with Privacy disabled, they are still subject to Barge In attempts and Call Waiting signals to the non-private extension. Privacy Release Groups You can program extensions into Privacy Release Groups to simplify sharing outside calls. Co-workers in the same Privacy Release Group can easily join another group member’s outside call just by pressing the Get dial tone for a new outside or Intercom call just by lifting the handset. Use Privacy to prevent interruptions at high priority extensions. Quickly join in a co-worker’s outside call. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 63 Features busy line -key. The co-worker immediately joins in unannounced and uninvited. Privacy Release Groups are a quick alternative to Conference where control over the Conference is not required. In a Customer Service group, for example, a supervisor could just press a busy line key to monitor any agent’s call. If desired, an extension user can prevent other members of their Privacy Release Group from interrupting their active call. This ensures that group members will not interrupt confidential calls. Any number of extensions can be in the same Privacy Release Group. However, an extension can only be in a single group. Members of the Group must have line keys and access to the lines they want to share. Privacy Release Groups utilizes a Conference circuit. The following table shows the Conference capacities: The system’s 32 Conference circuits are dynamically allocated as users request them. Private Line A Private Line is a line reserved for a keyset for placing and answering calls. A user with a Private Line knows when important calls are for them. Additionally, the user has their own line for placing calls that is not available to others in the system. There are three types of Private Lines: ❥ Incoming Only The keyset has a Private Line only for incoming calls. The user cannot place a call on the Private Line. A customer service representative may want an incoming only Private Line to be sure customers can always get through. ❥ Outgoing Only The keyset has a Private Line only for outgoing calls. The Private Line does not ring for incoming calls. A service dispatcher may want an outgoing only Private Line so they can always get in touch with field technicians. ❥ Both Ways The keyset has a Private Line for both incoming and outgoing calls. An executive may want a both ways Private Line that is available only to them for placing and answering calls. You can optionally set up shared Private Lines between a group of co-workers that work closely together. Programmable Idle Menu Soft Keys (Super Display) The Super Display Telephone idle menu soft keys are customizable in system programming and by the extension user. This allows the idle mode display to be tailored to meet the needs of each Super Display Telephone user. The first chart below shows the default idle menu soft key assignments. The second chart shows all the available idle mode soft keys, their definitions, and the related programming codes. Description Capacity Conference circuits 32 Maximum simultaneous users in Conference (total of all Conferences system-wide) 32 Maximum simultaneous conferences 8 Maximum parties in any one Conference (lines and/or extensions) 8 You can have a line reserved exclusively for your own use. Customize the Super Display Telephone idle menu soft keys to exactly meet the user’s needs. 64 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Super Display Telephone Default Idle Menu Soft Key Assignments Key Display Display Key 1 Directory (Blank) 7 2 Program (Blank) 8 3 V-Mail -- (Blank) 9 4 Calls -- SP Dial 1 10 5 Page SP Dial 2 11 6 (Blank) (Blank) 12 Super Display Telephone Idle Menu Soft Key Options Entry Display Description 00 UNDEFINED The key has no function and the idle menu display is blank. 01 Directory Press to access additional soft keys for Intercom, System Speed Dial, and Personal Speed Dial Directory Dialing. 02 Extension Press to directly access Intercom Directory Dialing. 03 Personal Press to directly access Personal Speed Dial Directory Dialing. 04 Company Press to directly access System Speed Dial Directory Dialing. 05 Program Press to program the following: • Call Forwarding • Call Screening • Distinctive Ringing • Handsfree Reply • Intercom Voice Announce and Forced Intercom Ringing • Language Selection • Name Programming • Speed Dial • Volume for Ringing, Off-Hook Ringing, and Page 06 V-Mail Press to call your voice mail mailbox. This soft key also shows the number of new messages in your mailbox. 07 Calls Press to review your Caller ID log. This soft key also shows the number of new calls you have not yet reviewed. 08 Page Press to initiate a Page announcement. 09 SP Dial 1 Press to access Personal Speed Dial bins 701-710. The display shows the Speed Dial numbers (or names - if programmed). 10 SP Dial 2 Press to access Personal Speed Dial bins 711-720. The display shows the Speed Dial number (or name - if programmed). 11-30 PERS SPDL BIN 1- 20 Press to access the associated Personal Speed Dial bin (701-720). The display shows the Speed Dial number (or name - if programmed). DSX Product Description Features ◆ 65 Features Pulse to Tone Conversion An extension can use Pulse to Tone Conversion while placing an outside call to change the dialing mode from dial pulse to DTMF. For a system in a dial pulse area, this permits users to access DTMF services (such as telephone banking) from their DP area. Pulse to tone conversion also helps dial pulse callers use another company’s automated attendant dialing options. The user can, for example: ❥ Place a call to their bank over a DP line. ❥ After the banking service answers, wait 6 seconds. (The system automatically converts dialing to DTMF.) ❥ Dial additional banking options. Regional Defaults Use the Regional Defaults capability to switch your system from the North American mode to the Latin American mode. Switching your system to the Latin American mode makes the following changes: ❥ The default language in programming, SMDR, and all telephone displays is Spanish. ❥ The Latin American Toll Restriction options are enabled. This is set up when you initialize each Toll Restriction Table. Removing Lines and Extensions from Service Supervisors and attendants can remove problem lines and extensions from service. This helps ensure maximum system performance. For example, the attendant can busy-out a noisy line or problem extension until service personnel can repair the problem. The line or extension the appears busy to all callers. Following repair, the attendant or supervisor can return the line to service. Reverse Voice Over While on a handset call, Reverse Voice Over lets a busy keyset user make a private Intercom call to an idle co-worker. The busy user just presses and holds down a programmed Reverse Voice Over key to make a private call to the assigned co-worker. The initial caller cannot hear the Reverse Voice Over conversation. The private Intercom call continues until the Reverse Voice Over caller releases the key again. The initial handset call can be an outside call or an Intercom call. An extension can have Reverse Voice Over keys for more than one co-worker. Reverse Voice Over could help a salesperson, for example, when placing a call to an important client. The salesperson can talk with the client and give special instructions to an assistant — without interrupting the initial call. Use special services (such as telephone banking) over dial pulse lines. The system is compatible with both North American and Latin American applications. Temporarily remove problem extensions and lines from service until they can be repaired. Privately call a co-worker while you’re busy on your handset. 66 ◆ Features DSX Product Description When the keyset is idle, the Reverse Voice Over key functions the same as a Hotline key. The key also shows at a glance the status of the associated extension: Reverse Voice Over uses a system Conference circuit while it is active. The following table shows the system’s Conference capacities: The system’s 32 Conference circuits are dynamically allocated as users request them. Ringdown Extension A Ringdown Extension automatically calls a co-worker, voice mail, a Ring Group, a UCD Group, or a Speed Dial number when the user lifts the handset. The call automatically goes through — there is no need for the user to dial digits or press additional keys. Ringdown extensions are frequently used for lobby phones, where the caller just lifts the handset to get the information desk. Ringing Line Preference Ringing Line Preference lets a keyset user answer a ringing call by just lifting the handset. For a user that primarily answers calls, Ringing Line Preference ensures that ringing calls have priority. The tables below Reverse Voice Over Busy Lamp Indications When the key is: The covered extension is: Off Idle or not installed On Busy or ringing Medium Flash Assigned extension is in DND for outside calls (option 1) Fast Flash Assigned extension is in DND for Intercom calls (option 2) or All Calls (option 3) Description Capacity Conference circuits 32 Maximum simultaneous users in Conference (total of all Conferences system-wide) 32 Maximum simultaneous conferences 8 Maximum parties in any one Conference (lines and/or extensions) 8 Call another extension, group or voice mail just by lifting the handset. Simply lift the handset to answer a ringing call. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 67 Features show the interaction between Ringing Line Preference and other features for both handset and headset calls. Feature Keyset Attendant RLP = Y RLP = N RLP = Y RLP = N Does lifting the handset answer the ringing call? Intercom (page 51) Ringing Intercom calls Yes Yes No1 No1 Key Ring (page 51) (Line/Loop Keys) Yes No Yes No Transfer (page 77) Yes No Yes No Direct Inward Line (page 35) Yes No Yes No Group Ring (page 46) Yes Yes N/A N/A Extension Hunting (page 43) (Call to UCD master) Yes Yes No1 No Call Coverage Keys (page 25) No No No No Group Call Pickup (page 46) No No No No 1Ringing Line Preference will not answer a call ringing the Operator Call Key. 68 ◆ Features DSX Product Description When multiple calls ring an extension simultaneously, the system services the ringing calls in the following order: 1. INTERCOM Key 2. Line Key (from lowest to highest) 3. Loop Key (from lowest to highest) In addition, if two extensions with Ringing Line Preference answer the same outside call simultaneously, the system connects the call to the lowest numbered extension. Prime Line vs. Ringing Line Preference Ringing Line Preference has priority over Prime Line. For example, an extension with Ringing Line Preference will answer a ringing line, not get dial tone on their Prime Line. In addition, a ringing Prime Line will have priority over any other ringing line. The seize priority is as follows: ❥ Ringing Prime Line ❥ Ringing non-Prime Line ❥ Prime Line Save Number Dialed Save Number Dialed permits an extension user to save their last outside number and easily redial it later on. For example, an extension user can recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits. The system retains the saved number until the user stores a new one in its place. Save Number Dialed saves in system memory a dialed number up to 20 digits. The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same line as for the initial call. However, if that line is busy and is part of a Line Group, Save Number Dialed will Feature Keyset Attendant RLP = Y RLP = N RLP = Y RLP = N Does pressing SPEAKER while in the Headset mode answer the ringing call? Intercom (page 51) Ringing Intercom calls Yes Yes No1 No1 Key Ring (page 51) (Line/Loop Keys) Yes No Yes No Transfer (page 77) Yes No Yes No Direct Inward Line (page 35) Yes No Yes No Group Ring (page 46) Yes Yes N/A N/A Extension Hunting (page 43) (Call to UCD master) Yes Yes No1 No1 Call Coverage Keys (page 25) No No No No Group Call Pickup (page 46) No No No No 1Ringing Line Preference will not answer a call ringing the Operator Call Key. Save the number you just dialed for quick redialing. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 69 Features automatically select the next line in the group. Save Number Dialed requires a uniquely programmed Feature Key on the extension or DSS Console. Selectable Display Messaging An extension user can select a pre programmed Selectable Display Message for their extension. Keyset callers see the selected message when they call the user’s extension. Selectable Display Messaging provides personalized text messaging. For example, an extension user could select the message “GONE FOR THE DAY.” Any keyset user calling the extension would see the message. Other than displaying the message, the system puts the call though normally. The are 16 Selectable Display Messages (01-16) set up in system programming. Messages 01-09 are preset by default, but can be changed to meet the site requirements. Messages 10-16 are initially undefined. Any message can be appended by the extension user. For example, a user could select message 09 (OUT UNTIL) and append the time they are expected back (e.g., 5:00). The total length of the message plus any user appended entries cannot exceed 18. Selectable Display Messages cannot begin with numbers. Following are the 16 default Selectable Display Messages. While you’re away from the phone, callers can receive personalized text messages you set up. Option Default Message 01 CALL (plus 15 user entries) Message 02 BACK BY (plus 12 user entries) Message 03 MEETING IN ROOM (plus 4 user entries) Message 04 OUT TO LUNCH (plus 7 user entries) Message 05 GONE FOR THE DAY (plus 3 user entries) Message 06 ON VACATION (plus 8 user entries) Message 07 ON BUSINESS TRIP (plus 3 user entries) Message 08 IN A MEETING (plus 7 user entries) Message 09 OUT UNTIL (plus 10 user entries) Message 10 Undefined (up to 20 characters) Message 11 Undefined (up to 20 characters) Message 12 Undefined (up to 20 characters) Message 13 Undefined (up to 20 characters) Message 14 Undefined (up to 20 characters) Message 15 Undefined (up to 20 characters) Message 16 Undefined (up to 20 characters) 70 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Single Line Telephones The system is compatible with 500 type (dial pulse) and 2500 type (DTMF) analog telephone devices. This includes on-premises single line telephones (SLTs), fax machines, and modems. In DSX-40, SLTs connect to analog ports in the main equipment cabinet. In DSX-80/160, SLTs connect to SLIU PCBs. Each analog port provides power and ring voltage for the connected SLT. The analog ports use DTMF receivers. Each system provides 10 DTMF receivers that are shared by all connected analog ports. Message Waiting Both DSX-40 and DSX-80/160 support FSK Message Waiting lamps. DSX-80/160 also provides support for high voltage Message Waiting lamps – while DSX-40 does not. Speed Dial Speed Dial gives an extension user quick access to frequently called numbers. There are two types of Speed Dial: System and Personal. Speed Dial numbers can be up to 32 digits long, using 0-9, # and *. Every Speed Dial can have a programmed name up to 18 characters long. The name shows in the telephone display as the Speed Dial number dials out. Speed Dial can store outside numbers and Intercom digits. The capability to store Intercom digits provides the user with “one-touch” access to features they use most often. For example, a user can have a Speed Dial bin that simplifies forwarding calls to voice mail or a co-worker. System Speed Dial System Speed Dial gives every extension access to the same set of stored numbers. The system provides 999 System Speed Dial numbers. Users can access these numbers by pressing a uniquely programmed System Speed Dial Feature Key or by dialing the Speed Dial bin number. Depending on the system option selected (see Programming below), users have dial access to either 9, 99 or 999 System Speed Dial bins. Personal Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial provides extensions with 20 numbers stored privately for their own use. The Personal Speed Dial keys on a DSS Console access the same bins as the extension to which it is attached. Unique Speed Dial Entries In addition to the digits 0-9, # and *, you can enter the following for additional dialing options: Storing Line Routing in a Speed Dial Bin When you program a Speed Dial bin, you can select either a line or a Line Group over which the call should route. For example, you can enter 1 for line 1 or 90 for Line Group 90. ❥ If you enter a Line Group number, the system will follow the Line Group programming and select an available line in the group for the call. Connect analog devices such as single line telephones and fax machines to the system. Instead of dialing a long telephone number to reach a client or customer, use Speed Dial instead. Also, store Intercom digits for quick access to commonly used features. For this option: From system programming, press this key: From user programming, press this key: Flash Feature Key 1 FLASH Wait (not used) Feature Key 2 DND Pause Feature Key 3 MUTE DSX Product Description Features ◆ 71 Features ❥ If you enter a line number and the line is busy when the Speed Dial bin tries to dials out, the user hears busy tone. If their extension has Line Queuing, they can dial 2 to queue for a line to become free. If they hang up, the system converts the queue to a Line Callback. ❥ The capability to dial 90-98 to select a Line Group for a Speed Dial call is a permanent feature and not affected by programming. Centrex Compatibility Speed Dial offers unique compatibility with connected Centrex services. A Speed Dial number can accommodate both placing a new call and outdialing the stored Speed Dial number on an active Centrex line. This enables features such as Centrex Transfer and Conference. Speed Dial adheres to the following rules. 1. When a user active on an outside call presses TRANSFER and selects a Speed Dial number (using any method), the system examines the contents of the stored Speed Dial bin. 2. If the first entry in the bin is an F (Flash command), the system flashes the connected line and outdials the contents of the bin (ignoring the line selection associated with the bin). Note that this unique Centrex integration also pertains to voice mail ports accessing stored Speed Dial numbers. Chaining Bins for Dialing Long Numbers A Speed Dial number can be up to 32 digits long. The system allows this by automatically using the next adjacent bin for entries longer than 16 digits. For example, assume you want to store a Personal Speed Dial number for a banking service (203-926 5400) followed by a pause and your 10 digit customer code (9876543210). If you store the entries in bin 701, the following occurs: ❥ The system stores the first 16 digits (203 926 5400 Pause 98765) in bin 701. ❥ The system stores the remaining digits (43210) in bin 702. Chaining Notes: ❥ In the above example, bin 702 is inaccessible for viewing, programming, or dialing. It only becomes available if you reprogram bin 701 to be 16 digits or less. ❥ Since bin 720 is the last Personal Speed Dial bin, it can contain only 16 digits. Split (Alternate) With Split, an extension user can split (alternate) between a current call and a new call. Split lets the extension user easily alternate between the calls without joining (Conferencing) the parties together. Switch between active calls without Conferencing the calls together. 72 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Station Instruments The system offers 22-Button, 34-Button, 34-Button Advanced, and Super Display keyset telephones. All telephone models are available in two colors: black and white. System keysets provide a host of sophisticated extension features. 22-Button Display Telephone with Speakerphone The 22-Button Display Telephone features a large 3 lineby- 24 character alphanumeric display with 4 Interactive Soft Keys for intuitive feature access. It also provides 10 Personal Speed Dial bin keys, 12 programmable Feature Keys and 12 fixed function keys for streamlined operation. Additionally, this telephone offers a headset jack and built-in speakerphone. Unique features include dual LEDs, built-in wall mounting, and an innovative two position angle adjustment. 34-Button Backlit Display Telephone with Speakerphone The 34-Button Display Telephone features a large 3 lineby- 24 character backlit alphanumeric display with 4 Interactive Soft Keys for intuitive feature access. It also provides 10 Personal Speed Dial bin keys, 24 programmable Feature Keys and 12 fixed function keys for streamlined operation. Additionally, this telephone offers a backlit keypad, a headset jack, and built-in speakerphone. Unique features include dual LEDs, built-in wall mounting, and an innovative two position angle adjustment. 34-Button Backlit Display Telephone with Full-Duplex Speakerphone This feature-rich 34-Button Display Telephone features a large 3 line-by-24 character backlit alphanumeric display with 4 Interactive Soft Keys for intuitive feature access. It also provides 10 Personal Speed Dial bin keys, 24 programmable Feature Keys and 12 fixed function keys for streamlined operation. Additionally, this telephone offers a built-in full duplex speakerphone (with no external speaker or microphone required), a backlit keypad, and a headset jack. Unique features include dual LEDs, built-in wall mounting, and an innovative two position angle adjustment. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 73 Features Ring/Message Lamp Each keyset has a Ring/Message Lamp. Located on the upper right of the keyset faceplate, the Ring/Message Lamp indicates for the following features: Station Message Detail Recording Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides a record of the system’s outside calls. Typically, the record outputs to a customer-provided printer, terminal or SMDR data collection device. SMDR allows you to monitor the usage at each extension and line. This makes charge-back and traffic management easier. SMDR includes both incoming and outgoing calls, and can be turned off system-wide or selectively for each line. The SMDR call record outputs when the call completes. The system assigns the SMDR record to the last extension on the call. For example, if extension 306 answers the call, talks for 20 minutes, and then transfers the call to extension 302, extension 302 “owns” the entire call record as soon as they hang up. SMDR requires a customer-provided data collection device connected to the system’s RS-232 port. The default baud rate is 38,400. The data format is fixed at 8 data bits, no parity, with one stop bit (8N1). Connection requires: 34-Button Backlit Super Display Telephone with Half-Duplex Speakerphone The Super Display Telephone is the system’s most sophisticated telephone instrument. It features a large 9 line-by- 24 character backlit alphanumeric display with 12 Interactive Soft Keys for intuitive feature access. It also provides 10 Personal Speed Dial bin keys, 24 programmable Feature Keys and 12 fixed function keys for streamlined operation. Additionally, this telephone offers a built-in half duplex speakerphone (with no external speaker or microphone required), a backlit keypad, and a headset jack. Unique features include dual LEDs, built-in wall mounting, and an innovative two position angle adjustment. For this feature: The lamp does this: Caller ID Logging Double-wink on (green) when there is a new Caller ID record that has not been reviewed Central Office Calls, Answering Slow flash (green) as call rings Direct Inward Line Slow flash (green) as call rings Hold Slow flash (green) during Hold recall Intercom Slow flash (green) as call rings Message Waiting Fast flash (red) when user has a Message Waiting indication left Park Slow flash (green) during Park recall Transfer Slow flash (green as call rings) and during Transfer recall Voice Mail Fast flash (red) when messages are waiting in mailbox SMDR provides a printed record of your calls. 74 ◆ Features DSX Product Description System Identification The system administrator can enter the site name and telephone number into the system data base. This information is saved into system memory. Conditions • None Default Setting • No entries. System Programming Password Protection The system controls access to the programmable options according to the programming password the administrator enters. There are three password levels: T1 Lines T1 lines require a unique T1 PCB (P/N 80061) and give the system a maximum of 24 lines in a single PCB slot. The available T1 line types include: ❥ Loop Start (DTMF and Dial Pulse) ❥ Ground Start (DTMF and Dial Pulse) ❥ Direct Inward Dial (DID) Wink Start (DTMF and Dial Pulse) ❥ Direct Inward Dial (DID) Immediate Start (DTMF and Dial Pulse) ❥ E&M Tie Line Wink Start (DTMF and Dial Pulse) Store the site name and telephone number in the system data base. Control access to system programming. Logging On with this Password: Gives you access to these programs: System Administrator 1 (level 1) 1001-01: System Type (page 595) 1001-02: Software Version (page 595) 1001-03: DSP Version (page 596) 1011-01: System Name (page 597) 1011-02: Telephone Number (page 597) 1021-01: System Time (page 599) 1021-02: System Date (page 599) 1022-01: Automatic Daylight Savings Time Setting (page 600) 1031-01: New Password (page 602) (for level accessed) 1701-01: Number of System Speed Dial Bins (page 714) 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assignment) (page 715) 2121-Feature Keys (page 753) 2122-Ring Override (Key Ring Override) (page 759) 2123-BLF (DSS Keys) (page 760) 2123-BLF (DSS Keys) (page 760) 2124-Soft Keys (Idle Menu Soft Keys for Super Display) (page 761) 2151-Assignment (Personal Speed Dial Bin Assignment) (page 775) 2401-Config (DSS Console Configuration) (page 800) 2402-Keys (DSS Console Keys) (page 801) 25xx-Text Messages (Selectable Display Messaging) (page 806) System Administrator 2 (level 1) Installer (level 3) All In DSX-80/160, provides for connection to advanced digital lines and simplifies installation. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 75 Features ❥ E&M Tie Line Immediate Start (DTMF and Dial Pulse) T1 gives the system the advantages of advanced digital calling as well as conserving PCB slots. For example, you can set up a system with 12 loop start lines, six tie lines, and six DID lines and use only a single PCB slot. Additionally, the T1 PCB has its own on-board processor and DSP so it minimally impacts other system resources. Note: Although the T1 PCB can connect directly to the telco’s T1 smart jack, your telco may require that you purchase and install a separate Channel Service Unit (CSU). This unit installs between the smart jack and the T1 PCB. ANI/DNIS Support The system is compatible with telco's T1 Automatic Number Identification (ANI) and Dialed Number Information Service (DNIS) services. ANI/DNIS services can be provided on T1 loop start, ground start, and DID lines (but not E&M). ANI/DNIS Compatibility provides: ❥ Selectable Receive Format You can set up the system for compatibility with any combination of ANI, DNIS and Dialed Number (Address) data provided by the telco. ❥ Flexible Routing for DID Lines For DID lines, the system can route the incoming call based on the received DNIS data and the entries stored in the DID Translation Table. See Direct Inward Line (page 35) for more. ❥ Caller ID The system can use the received ANI data to display the caller’s number on the called extension’s display. The ANI data can be up to 10 digits long. FSK Caller ID The T1 PCB can also receive FSK-based Caller ID (if provided by the telco), the same as the COIU (analog) line cards. To receive this type of Caller ID, you must enable DSP Caller ID for the T1 line circuits in programming. See the Programming below for more. Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference Tandem Calls allows an extension user to join two outside callers in a line-to-line conference. The extension user can then drop out of the call, leaving the lines in an Unsupervised Conference. The extension user that established the Conference is not part of the conversation. The Conference continues until either outside party hangs up. Tandem Calls uses a Conference circuit. The following table shows the system’s Conference capacities: The system’s 32 Conference circuits are dynamically allocated as users request them. Join two callers in Conference, leave the call and let their conversation continue. Description Capacity Conference circuits 32 Maximum simultaneous users in Conference (total of all Conferences system-wide) 32 Maximum simultaneous conferences 8 Maximum parties in any one Conference (lines and/or extensions) 8 76 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Tie Lines Tie lines directly link a local DSX-80/160 telephone system with one or more remote DSX-80/160 systems. The link is independent of the telco's switched network. When a local system user seizes a tie line, they hear Intercom dial tone from the remote system. The user can then use many of the features normally available to the remote system’s single line telephones, including: ❥ Dialing Intercom extensions in the remote system. ❥ Using the remote system's lines for outgoing calls. ❥ Accessing System Speed Dial bins in the remote system. ❥ Using the remote system’s Paging. Tie Lines require a T1 PCB and Tie Line service from the telco. Time and Date The system Time and Date appears on display telephones and Station Message Detail Recording reports. The system administrator can change the time and date from the system programming mode. In addition, extension users can change the time and date from the User Programmable Features. Although the data is entered in 24-hour format, it always displays in 12-hour format (e.g., 1300 = 1:00PM). The system can automatically adjust the time for Daylight Savings Time. Toll Restriction Toll Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing extensions to place only certain types of calls, the system administrator can control long distance costs. The system applies Toll Restriction according to an extension’s Toll Restriction Level. For each of the 7 Toll Restriction Levels, the administrator can enable or disable the following options. ❥ Active Key Pad (Continuous Dialing) Active Key Pad continuously enables the telephone key pad. This is important if co-workers typically use dial-up services (such as automated banking) or frequently dial into voice mail systems. With Active Key Pad disabled, the system disables the telephone key pad 6 seconds after the user has dialed their last digit. Toll Restriction controls Active Key Pad for both incoming and outgoing calls. ❥ N11 Dialing N11 Dialing enables or disables an extension’s ability to use N11 services such as directory assistance (411) and repair (611). Consider enabling this option if the connected telco charges by the call (i.e., meters) these services. Note that the system never restricts a user from dialing 911 or 1 + 911. ❥ 0 + Dialing 0 + Dialing enables or disables an extension’s ability to manually dial 0 + (operator assisted) calls. These calls typically include collect calls and credit card calls. Be sure to disable this option if you don’t want co-workers making these types of calls. The setting of 0 + Dialing does not affect the operation of international dialing (see the option immediately following). ❥ International (011) Dialing Use the International Dialing option to restrict extension access to high-cost international (011) dialing. You can, for example, enable international dialing for high priority users and executives while disabling international dialing for all other co-workers. ❥ Equal Access (1010 + XXX) Dialing Equal Access allows users to select long distance carriers other than your primary carrier. Your primary In DSX-80/160, link two systems together for inter-system Intercom calling and other features. The Time and Date shows on telephone displays and prints on system reports. Use Toll Restriction to help you control the costs of outgoing long distance calls. DSX Product Description Features ◆ 77 Features carrier is the long distance provider you access when you seize a line and dial 1. To reach another provider, dial 1010 and that provider’s three-digit code (e.g., 1010220). The system does not restrict the numbers dialed after the Equal Access code, but can prevent users from dialing specific Equal Access codes. ❥ 1 + Dialing This type of Toll Restriction can restrict: - 1 + 3-digit (1 + NPA and 1 + NXX) dialing. - 1 + 6-digit (1 + NPA + NXX) dialing. ❥ Dialing without a Leading 1 This type of Toll Restriction can restrict: - 3-digit (NPA and NXX) dialing. - 6-digit (NPA + NXX) dialing. The Toll Restriction Tables There are 5 separate tables for each Toll Restriction Level. Each table can hold up to 96 entries. The Toll Restriction Tables can individually restrict: ❥ Equal Access Dialing. ❥ Calls dialed with a leading 1 (1 + Dialing). ❥ Calls dialed without a leading 1. Transfer Transfer permits an extension user to send (i.e., extend) an active call to any other extension in the system, a Ring Group, UCD Group or voice mail. With Transfer, any extension user can quickly send a call to the desired co-worker. A call a user transfers automatically recalls if not picked up at the destination extension. If a transferred outside call is still unanswered, the call diverts to Key Ring. This assures that users do not lose or inadvertently abandon their transfers. An extension user can Transfer both outside calls and Intercom calls. The system allows the following types of transfers: ❥ Screened Transfer The transferring user announces the call to the destination before hanging up. ❥ Unscreened Transfer The transferring party extends the call without an announcement. Distinctive Flash Rate on Recall Transfer recall features a distinctive flash rate for line keys (see the chart below). This allows the keyset extension user to easily differentiate new calls that are ringing from transferred calls that are recalling. Transfer Recall Display The Transfer recall display occurs as the call is ringing the extension that initially transferred it as well as after the call diverts to Key Ring. It identifies: ❥ The type of call recalling the extension. Send the outside call you are on to a co-worker. Distinctive Flash Rate on Transfer Recall For this type of call: You see this flash rate: Call that you transferred Slow Flash (red) Call that you initially transferred recalling your phone Double Wink On (green) 78 ◆ Features DSX Product Description ❥ The extension to which the call was initially transferred. Handsfree Transfer Handsfree Transfer allows an extension user to Transfer an outside call directly to a co-worker’s speakerphone. Hotline Automatic Transfer With Hotline Automatic Transfer, the extension can Transfer their call to a co-worker just by pressing their Hotline key and hanging up. Without Hotline Automatic Transfer, the user must press TRANSFER before pressing the Hotline key. If the user frequently uses their Hotline key for one-button Transfer to co-workers, Hotline Automatic Transfer is recommended. If the user prefers to consult with their Hotline partner rather than Transfer, disabling Hotline Automatic Transfer would be helpful. • Pressing TRANSFER + Call Coverage Key can Transfer a call to an uninstalled extension’s mailbox (if the mailbox is enabled). • Pressing a Hotline key can also Transfer a call to an uninstalled extension’s mailbox (if the mailbox is enabled). User Programmable Features User Programmable Features allow an extension user to dial mnemonics to customize the way certain features work on their telephone. With User Programmable Features, there is no need to rely on a System Administrator or Communications Manager to set up each phone. These User-Programmable Features include: ❥ Call Forwarding Clear All ❥ Direct Station Selection (DSS) Assignment ❥ Feature Key Assignment ❥ Feature Key Ringing for Call Coverage Keys, Group Call Pickup Keys, and Line Keys ❥ Headset Mode ❥ Hotline Key Assignment ❥ Off Hook Signaling Setup (including Camp-On, Off Hook Ringing for outside calls, and Voice Over for Intercom calls) ❥ Paging (Incoming) ❥ Prime Line Assignmen ❥ Programmable Idle Menu Soft Keys (Super Display) ❥ Ringing Line Preference ❥ Speed Dial Bin Setup (Personal and System) ❥ Time and Date ❥ Voice Announce (For incoming Intercom calls) Extension users can set up their telephones to meet their own unique requirements. User Programmable Features To program a feature, press # and the feature’s code. For example, to enable incoming Paging, press # and dial V P Y, then SPEAKER to hang up. By default, Call Forwarding Clear All, System Speed Dial, and Time and Date are only available to the attendant. Feature Mnemonic Numeric Operation Access Level Call Forwarding Clear All #CC #22 #CC + Y to clear (cancel) forwarding or N to exit without clearing + SPEAKER to hang up. 4 and 5 Headset Mode #HS #47 #HS + Y to enable or N to disable + SPEAKER to exit. 3-5 Hotline #HL #45 #HL + Press flashing Hotline key + Enter extension for new Hotline partner + HOLD + Program another Hotline key or SPEAKER to exit. 3-5 DSX Product Description Features ◆ 79 Features Off Hook Signaling #OHS #647 #OHS + Select mode (1 = Outside line, 2 = Hotline partner, 3 = Intercom) + Select option (see below) + SPEAKER to exit. For outside lines: 1 = Camp-On tone, 2 = Offhook Ringing, CLEAR = None For Hotline partner: 1 = Camp-On, 2 = Voice Over, CLEAR = None, For Intercom: 1 = Camp-On, 2 = Voice Over, CLEAR = None 3-5 Paging (Incoming) #VP #87 #VP + Y to enable or N to disable + SPEAKER to exit. 3-5 Prime Line Assignment #PLA #752 #PLA + Press one of your flashing programmable keys, INTERCOM, or CLEAR for none + SPEAKER to exit. 3-5 Feature Key Assignments #KP #57 #KP + Press key you want to program + HOLD + INTERCOM + Press Volume Up or Volume Down to select key option + HOLD + (Enter any additional data if required1 + HOLD) + Press Volume Up or Volume Down to select another key to program, or SPEAKER twice to exit. 3-5 1 To set up a System Night key, press CLEAR instead of entering additional data. Feature Key Ringing #RAC #722 Call Coverage Keys: #RAC + Call Coverage Key repeatedly to select ringing mode + SPEAKER to exit. Call Coverage Keys flash as follows: Lamp only = On red, Immediate ring = On green, Delay ring = Fast flash green. 2-5 #RAL #725 Outside Line Keys: #RAL + Line Key repeatedly to select ringing mode + SPEAKER to exit. Line keys flash as follows: Lamp only = On red, Immediate ring = On green, Delay ring = Fast flash green, Night ring = Slow flash green. #RAP #727 Group Call Pickup Keys: #RAP + Group Call Pickup Key repeatedly to select ringing mode + SPEAKER to exit. Group Call Pickup Keys flash as follows: Lamp only = On red, Immediate ring = On green, Delay ring = Fast flash green. Programmable Idle Menu Soft Keys (Super Display) #SM #76 Press the soft key you want to program (or press Volume Up or Volume Down to scroll through the keys) + HOLD + INTERCOM + Volume Up or Volume Down to select key option + HOLD + SPEAKER to exit. 1-5 Ringing Line Preference #RLP #757 #RLP + Y to enable or N to disable + SPEAKER to exit. 2-5 User Programmable Features To program a feature, press # and the feature’s code. For example, to enable incoming Paging, press # and dial V P Y, then SPEAKER to hang up. By default, Call Forwarding Clear All, System Speed Dial, and Time and Date are only available to the attendant. Feature Mnemonic Numeric Operation Access Level 80 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Voice Mail The system is fully compatible with IntraMail, UltraMail, and NVM-Series Voice Mail with Automated Attendant Systems. These systems provide telephone users with comprehensive voice mail and Automated Attendant features. Automated Attendant automatically answers the system’s incoming calls. After listening to a customized message, an outside caller can dial a system extension or use voice mail. When installing voice mail, refer to the documentation provided with your voice mail system for the specifics. Integrated voice mail enhances the telephone system with the following features: Call Forwarding to Voice Mail An extension user can forward their calls to voice mail. Once forwarded, calls to the extension connect to that extension’s mailbox. The caller can leave a message in the mailbox instead of calling back later. Forwarding can occur for all calls immediately, for unanswered calls or when the extension is busy, or just for unanswered calls. Leaving a Message Voice mail lets a keyset extension user easily leave a message at an extension that is unanswered, busy, or in Do Not Disturb. The caller just presses V-MAIL to leave a message in the called extension’s mailbox. There is no need to call back later. Speed Dial, Personal #SP #77 #SP + Press bin key (for bins 701-710) or dial the bin key (701-720) + HOLD + Dial outside line (e.g., 1), Line group (e.g., 90-98), or ICM for Intercom feature + HOLD + Number to store + HOLD twice + Name + HOLD + Press another bin key or SPEAKER to exit. 1-5 Speed Dial, System #SP #77 #SP + Dial System Speed Dial bin number (e.g., 201) + HOLD + Dial outside line (e.g., 1), Line group (e.g., 90-98), or INTERCOM for Intercom feature + HOLD + Number to store + HOLD twice + Name + HOLD + Dial another System Speed Dial bin or SPEAKER to exit. 4 and 5 System Program Access #*#* #*#* + Enter programming password 3-5 Time and Date #TD #83 #TD + Enter time in 24-hour clock using hours (2 digits), minutes (2 digits) and seconds (2 digits) + HOLD + Enter date using month (2 digits), day (2 digits) and year (4 digits) + HOLD + SPEAKER to exit. 4 and 5 Intercom Voice Announce (for incoming Intercom calls) #VA #82 #VA + V for voice announce or R for ring + SPEAKER to exit. 3-5 Voice mail ends the frustration and cost of missed calls, inaccurate written messages and telephone tag, freeing up the company’s receptionists and secretaries for more production work. User Programmable Features To program a feature, press # and the feature’s code. For example, to enable incoming Paging, press # and dial V P Y, then SPEAKER to hang up. By default, Call Forwarding Clear All, System Speed Dial, and Time and Date are only available to the attendant. Feature Mnemonic Numeric Operation Access Level DSX Product Description Features ◆ 81 Features Transferring to Voice Mail By using Transfer to Voice Mail, an extension user can Transfer a call to the user’s own or a co-worker’s mailbox. After the Transfer goes through, the caller can leave a message in the mailbox. The caller will hear the entire mailbox greeting after the Transfer goes through. Conversation Record While on a call, an extension user can have voice mail record the conversation. The keyset user just presses their Record key. Once recorded, the voice mail stores the conversation as a new message in the user’s mailbox. After calling their mailbox, a user can save, edit or delete the recorded conversation. The ability to use Conversation Record is controlled by an extension’s Class of Service. Conversation Record Key for a Co-worker’s Mailbox An extension user can have a Record key for a co-worker’s mailbox. While on a call, the user can press the key to record their conversation directly into the co-worker’s mailbox. The user can set up the Record key to record into any valid Subscriber Mailbox (including IntraMail Group Mailboxes and Master Mailboxes programmed as Subscriber Mailboxes). This could help a dispatcher, for example, that wants to record a conversation with a client right into the responsible technician’s mailbox. An extension can have multiple Record keys, each associated with a different mailbox. In addition, setting up a Record key for a co-worker’s mailbox is also available on DSS Consoles. Personal Answering Machine Emulation A keyset user can have their idle extension emulate a personal answering machine. This lets voice mail screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home. If activated, the extension’s incoming calls route to the user’s Subscriber Mailbox. Once the mailbox answers, the user hears the caller’s incoming message. The keyset user can then: ❥ Let the call go through to their mailbox. ❥ Intercept the call before it goes to their mailbox. Personal Answering Machine Emulation will intercept the following types of calls: ❥ Intercom calls ❥ Direct Inward Lines to the extension ❥ Automated Attendant Unscreened Transfers ❥ Automated Attendant Screened Transfers Personal Answering Machine Emulation will not intercept a call manually transferred to an extension. Voice Mail Overflow Voice mail can be the overflow destination for the following types of calls (refer to the individual features for the specifics): ❥ Direct Inward Line (page 35) A line that directly rings an extension can overflow to voice mail. ❥ Extension Hunting (page 43) Caution The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or record telephone conversations or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to a telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or requiring the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the telephone conversation.Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties. Refer to Call Screening (page 102). You may find that Call Screening better meets your requirements. 82 ◆ Features DSX Product Description A line that rings an Extension Hunting group can overflow to voice mail. ❥ Group Ring (page 46) A line that rings a group of extensions can overflow to voice mail. ❥ Key Ring (page 51) A line ringing an extension’s line keys can overflow to voice mail. Message Center Mailbox A Message Center Mailbox is a mailbox shared by more than one extension. Any keyset that has a Message Center Key for the shared mailbox can: ❥ Listen to the messages stored in the mailbox. ❥ Transfer calls to the shared mailbox. ❥ Use many other voice mail features previously available only at an extension’s individual mailbox. A Message Center Mailbox helps co-workers that work together closely - such as members of the same Pickup Group. For example, the group supervisor can send important messages to the shared Message Center Mailbox, to which any group member can respond when time allows. Each group member’s Message Center Key flashes (green) when messages are waiting. Interactive Soft Key Shows New Messages The Display and Super Display Telephone interactive soft keys show the number of new messages in the user’s mailbox. For example, if a Display Telephone user has 2 new messages in their mailbox, their voice mail soft key shows: VM02. If a Super Display Telephone user has 2 new messages in their mailbox, their voice mail soft key shows V-Mail 02. The new message count resets to 00 as soon as the user calls their mailbox (regardless of whether the new messages were listened to). The message count returns when the system updates the Ring/Message lamp on the phone. Voice Over Voice Over lets a user get through to a keyset extension user busy on a handset call. With Voice Over, the busy keyset extension user hears an alert tone followed by the voice of the interrupting party. The keyset extension user can respond to the interrupting party without being heard by the original caller. If desired, the keyset extension user can easily switch between their original caller and the interrupting co-worker. The original caller and the interrupting party can never hear each other’s conversation. Voice Over could help a lawyer, for example, waiting for an urgent call. While on a call with another client, the lawyer’s paralegal could announce the urgent call as soon as it comes in. The lawyer could then give the paralegal instructions on how to handle the situation — all without the original client hearing the conversation. Either a keyset or SLT can initiate a Voice Over, but only a keyset can receive a Voice Over. Voice Over uses a system Conference circuit. The following table shows the system’s Conference capacities: Get through to a co-worker busy on a handset call — without interrupting their call. Description Capacity Conference circuits 32 Maximum simultaneous users in Conference (total of all Conferences system-wide) 32 Maximum simultaneous conferences 8 Maximum parties in any one Conference (lines and/or extensions) 8 DSX Product Description Features ◆ 83 Features The system’s 32 Conference circuits are dynamically allocated as users request them. Volume and Contrast Controls A keyset user can press Volume Up and Volume Down to interactively adjust the volume of the following features while they are active: ❥ Intercom handset calls ❥ Intercom Handsfree calls ❥ Outside handset calls ❥ Outside Handsfree calls ❥ Paging receive volume ❥ Background Music ❥ Ringing ❥ Off-Hook Ringing There are nine steps in the Volume Control adjustment range. This makes it easier for the keyset user to set up just the right volume levels. The settings a user makes are retained after a system reset or power-down. Volume Control Presets The volume control presets allow the keyset user to preset the default volume for Ringing, Off-Hook Ringing, and incoming Page announcements while their telephone is idle. Presets for the remaining volume controls are not required since the user can easily adjust those volumes while idle. For example, to adjust the volume of Background Music, just press HOLD to active BGM and then adjust the volume. Display Brightness and Contrast Control While a keyset is idle, pressing Volume Up or Volume Down adjusts the contrast of the display. There are eight user-selectable contrast control values. The value a user sets is “remembered” by the system and automatically restored in the event of a power down or system reset. Display Brightness and Contrast Control Presets The brightness and contrast control presets let the keyset user preset the default active brightness, idle brightness, and contrast for their keyset display. The brightness presets are not available to a 24-button keyset since it doesn’t offer a backlit display. - Easily adjust the volume of ringing, Paging, and other features. 84 ◆ Features DSX Product Description Walking Class of Service Walking Class of Service allows an extension user to temporarily implement their Toll Restriction and Class of Service settings at a co-worker’s keyset. This is normally used to override dialing restrictions at a telephone. For example, an executive with an unrestricted phone can walk to any keyset in the building, implement Walking Class of Service, and dial without restriction. After the keyset goes idle, Walking Class of Service remains in effect for 10 seconds. This permits the user to make multiple calls before the keyset returns to its normal restrictions. Walking Class of Service and Extension Locking Walking Class of Service overrides Extension Locking. For example: ❥ Extension 301 is permitted by their Class of Service and Toll Restriction to use Paging and place long distance calls. ❥ Extension 306 locks their extension. While locked, Class of Service 15 prevents Paging and Toll Level 7 prevents long distance calls. These features are no longer available at extension 306. ❥ The extension 301 user goes to extension 306 and implements Walking Class of Service. ❥ The extension 301 user can then use 306 to make long distance calls and Page (even though 306 was locked to prevent those features). An extension user can temporarily use their Toll Restriction and Class of Service options at a co-worker’s phone. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 85 IntraMail Features IntraMail Features Introduction How To Use This Chapter This chapter provides detailed information on the IntraMail features. Similar to the Features chapter, the IntraMail features in this chapter are in alphabetical order, like a dictionary. This chapter subdivides each feature definition into headings as follows: ❥ Description Read Description to get an overview of the feature. ❥ Operation Operation provides convenient operation charts for each IntraMail feature. Start-Up (Default) Configuration Without IntraMail Installed The Built-In Automated Attendant is enabled. See page 100 for more. With IntraMail Installed IntraMail automatically assigns a mailbox to each extension in the number plan. ❥ By default in DSX-40, only the first 8 (300-307) Subscriber Mailboxes are active/enabled. ❥ By default in DSX-80/160, only the first 16 (300-315) subscriber mailboxes are active/enabled. ❥ The IntraMail Automated Attendant does not answer outside calls. If you are not familiar with the IntraMail features, review the IntraMail Feature Glossary on page 86. 86 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage Administrator Security Code Control • See Security Code in this glossary. Voice Mail Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox • See Next Call Routing Mailbox in this Glossary. Voice Mail Announcement Mailbox Mailbox that allows a prerecorded greeting to play to callers. • See Announcement Mailbox (page 96) for more. Automated Attendant Announcement Message The message that the System Administrator records for a specific Announcement Mailbox. • See Announcement Mailbox (page 96) for more. Automated Attendant Answer Schedule Override Enables an alternate greeting and alternate dialing options for callers. • See Answer Schedule Override (page 96) for more. Automated Attendant Answer Table Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. • See Answer Tables (page 96) for more. Automated Attendant Answering Machine Emulation A keyset on the connected telephone system can work like a home answering machine. • See Announcement Mailbox (page 96) for more. Voice Mail Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb sends Automated Attendant calls directly to an extension user’s mailbox. Their phone will not ring for calls from the Automated Attendant. • See Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (page 97) for more. Also see Greeting in this glossary. Automated Attendant Auto Erase or Save When a mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits their mailbox, IntraMail will either automatically save or erase the message. • See Auto Erase or Save (page 98) for more. Voice Mail Auto Time Stamp After a user listens to a message, IntraMail can optionally announce the time and date the message was left. • See Auto Time Stamp (page 98) for more. Voice Mail Automated Attendant The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers. • See Automated Attendant (page 99) for more. Automated Attendant Automated Attendant, Basic Provides built-in call answering capability when IntraMail is not installed. • See Automated Attendant (page 99) for more. Automated Attendant DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 87 IntraMail Features Automated Attendant Transfer While on an outside call, an extension user can transfer their call to the Automated Attendant so the caller can use the Automated Attendant dialing options. • See Automated Attendant Transfer (page 100) for more. Voice Mail Automatic Call Routing to a Mailbox • See Go to a Mailbox in this glossary. Automated Attendant Automatic Message Erase/Save • See Auto Erase or Save in this glossary. Voice Mail Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers If an Automated Attendant caller doesn’t dial any digits, IntraMail will automatically route them to a specified option (such as the operator or a mailbox). • See Automatic Routing for Rotrary Dial Callers (page 100) for more. Automated Attendant Bilingual Voice Prompts Provides IntraMail voice prompts in one of two active languages (primary and secondary) • See Call Forward to a Mailbox (page 101) for more. Voice Mail Call Forward to a Mailbox An extension user can forward their calls to their mailbox. • See Call Forward to a Mailbox (page 101) for more. Voice Mail Call Routing Mailbox The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers. • See Call Routing Mailbox (page 102) for more. Automated Attendant Call Screening Call Screening allows a display keyset extension user to listen to (screen) a voice mail message as it is being left in their mailbox. Unlike Personal Answering Machine emulation, Call Screening does not require the extension user to forward their calls immediately to voice mail. • See Call Screening (page 102) for more. Voice Mail Caller ID and Voice Mail A telephone company service that provides a caller’s number and optional name. The telephone system can pass this information to IntraMail to enable Caller ID with Return Call. • See Caller ID and Voice Mail (page 103) for more. System Caller ID with Return Call • See Make Call and Time and Date Stamp in this glossary. Voice Mail Calling (Logging Onto) a Mailbox • See Log Onto Voice Mail in this glossary. Voice Mail Calling the Automated Attendant Automated Attendant callers can use various IntraMail features and then return to the Automated Attendant for additional dialing options. • See Calling the Automated Attendant (page 103) for more. Automated Attendant Centrex Transfer The Automated Attendant to transfer a caller from a Centrex line to an outside number using the features of that Centrex line. • See Centrex Transfer (page 103) for more. Automated Attendant Name Description Usage 88 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Conversation Record Allows an extension user to record their active call as a message in their mailbox. IntraMail will broadcast a beep and a voice prompt to the callers as Conversation Record begins. • See Conversation Record (page 103) for more. Voice Mail Day, Night, and Holiday Greetings • See Flexible Answering Schedules in this glossary. Automated Attendant Deleting a Message • See Message Delete in this glossary. Voice Mail Deleting Mailbox Security Code • See Mailbox Security Code Delete in this glossary. Maintenance Dial Action Table Defines the dialing options for a Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer Table, which in turn provides those dialing options to Automated Attendant callers. • See Dial Action Table (page 104) for more. Automated Attendant Directory Dialing Directory Dialing allows an Automated Attendant caller to reach an extension by dialing the first few letters in the extension user’s name. • See Directory Dialing (page 105) for more. Automated Attendant Erasing All Messages Lets the System Administrator delete mailbox messages system-wide. • See Erasing All Messages (page 105) for more. Maintenance Exiting a Mailbox An extension user can exit their mailbox by dialing a code or by hanging up. • See Exiting a Mailbox (page 105) for more. Voice Mail Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Automatically sends calls to an extension’s mailbox without the user having to set up Call Forwarding. • See Extension Hunting to Voice Mail (page 106) for more. Voice Mail External Transfer An Automated Attendant caller can automatically route to an outside telephone number. • See External Transfer (page 106) for more. Automated Attendant Fax Detection The Automated Attendant can detect incoming fax calls and transfer them to a fax machine. • See Fax Detection (page 107) for more. System Flexible Answering Schedules The Automated Attendant can answer outside calls with different announcements and dialing options, depending on the time of day and day of week. • See Flexible Answering Schedules (page 107) for more. Automated Attendant Name Description Usage DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 89 IntraMail Features Flexible Call Routing The Automated Attendant can provide outside callers with a wide variety of dialing (routing) options. There are 3 components to Flexible Call Routing. • Answer Table Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each Voice Mail port, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. • Call Routing Mailbox The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers. • Dial Action Table Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer Table, which in turn provides those dialing options to Automated Attendant callers. • See Flexible Call Routing (page 107) for more. Automated Attendant Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan If the telephone system extension numbers are customized, the IntraMail mailbox numbers can be customized to match. • See Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan (page 107) for more. System Forced Unscreened Transfer A Subscriber Mailbox can optionally convert Automated Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened Transfers. • See Forced Unscreened Transfer (page 108) for more. Automated Attendant Forwarding Calls to a Mailbox • See Call Forward to a Mailbox in this glossary. Voice Mail Getting Recorded Help If an extension user dials an incorrect code or forgets what to dial while in their mailbox, they can request help from the IntraMail voice prompts. • See Getting Recorded Help (page 108) for more. Voice Mail Go to a Mailbox An Automated Attendant caller can dial a digit and route directly into a mailbox. • See Go to a Mailbox (page 108) for more. Automated Attendant Greeting A Subscriber Mailbox user can record up to three separate greetings and make any one of the three active. Caller’s to the user’s mailbox hear the active greeting. With Remote Greeting, an extension user can call into the Automated Attendant, access their mailbox, and remotely record their mailbox greeting. • See Greeting (page 109) for more. • Also see Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb in this glossary. Voice Mail Group Mailbox A Group Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox shared by a group of co-workers. • See Group Mailbox (page 110) for more. Voice Mail Guest Mailbox An outside party can have their own mailbox for receiving and sending messages. • See Guest Mailbox (page 111) for more. Voice Mail Name Description Usage 90 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Hang Up An Automated Attendant option that immediately hangs up the outside call. • See Hang Up (page 111) for more. Automated Attendant Help • See Getting Recorded Help in this glossary. Voice Mail Individual Line Greetings • See Multiple Company Greetings in this glossary. Automated Attendant Instruction Menu The Instruction Menu is the announcement that plays to Automated Attendant callers. Normally, the Instruction Menu provides callers with the Automated Attendant dialing options. • See Instruction Menu (page 112). Automated Attendant Leaving a Message Leave a voice mail message in a co-worker’s mailbox. • See Leaving a Message (page 112). Voice Mail Leaving a Message at a Busy/ DND Extension • See Leaving a Message above in this glossary. Voice Mail Leave a Quick Message • See Quick Message in this glossary. Automated Attendant Listening Options • See Listening to Messages in this glossary. Voice Mail Listening to Messages While or after listening to a message, an extension user has many message handling options from which to choose. • See Listening to Messages (page 113) for more. Voice Mail Local Notification • See Message Notification in this glossary. Voice Mail Log Onto Voice Mail An extension user can press a key to log onto (access) their IntraMail mailbox. With Remote Logon, an employee calling through the Automated Attendant can dial a single digit followed by their own mailbox number to remotely log onto their mailbox. • See Log Onto Voice Mail (page 115) for more. Voice Mail Mailbox Greeting • See Greeting in this glossary. Voice Mail Mailbox Logon • See Log Onto Voice Mail in this glossary. Voice Mail Mailbox Name A mailbox caller can hear the extension user’s prerecorded name instead of their mailbox number. • See Mailbox Name (page 116) for more. Voice Mail Mailbox Options Menu Sub-menu of a subscriber’s Main Menu that provides access to the Auto Time Stamp, Mailbox Security Code Delete, and Message Notification features. • See Mailbox Options Menu (page 116) for more. Voice Mail Mailbox Security Code Delete The System Administrator can delete the security code for any mailbox, effectively unlocking it. • See Mailbox Security Code Delete (page 116) for more. • Also see Security Code in this glossary. Maintenance Name Description Usage DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 91 IntraMail Features Mailbox Transfer • See Transfer to a Mailbox in this glossary. Voice Mail Main Menu The IntraMail options available to an extension user when they log onto their mailbox. • See Main Menu (page 116) for more. Voice Mail Make Call A Subscriber Mailbox user can listen to a voice message and dial MC to return the call without knowing their caller’s phone number. • See Make Call (page 117) for more. Voice Mail Master Mailboxes • See Group Mailbox in this glossary. Voice Mail Message Count Display The telephone display can show the number of new messages waiting in a user’s mailbox. • See Message Count Display (page 117) for more. Voice Mail Message Delete An extension user can delete any messages left in their mailbox. • See Message Delete (page 119) for more. Voice Mail Message Forward A subscriber can forward a message in their mailbox to a co-worker. They can optionally record a comment before the forwarded message. • See Message Forward (page 119) for more. Voice Mail Message Length The System Administrator can set the maximum length of a message that can be left in a user’s voice mailbox. • See Message Length (page 119) for more. Voice Mail Message Listen Mode When a user calls their mailbox, they can dial a code to listen to all their messages, their new messages, or their saved messages. • See Message Listen Mode (page 119) for more. Voice Mail Message Notification Once activated by the mailbox user, dials a telephone number to let the recipient know there are new messages in the mailbox. Notification can call extensions, local numbers, long distance numbers and pagers. • See Message Notification (page 120) for more. Voice Mail Message On Hold The System Administrator can record a message that will play to callers while they wait on Hold. • See Message On Hold (page 121) for more. Voice Mail Message Playback Direction An extension user can listen to their messages in either LIFO (last-in-first-out) or FIFO (first-in-first-out) order. • See Message Playback Direction (page 121) for more. Voice Mail Message Record • See Record and Send a Message in this glossary. Voice Mail Message Reply An extension user can reply to a message in their mailbox by dialing a simple code, without knowing the caller’s extension number. • See Message Reply (page 121) for more. Voice Mail Name Description Usage 92 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Message Retention IntraMail will save a mailbox’s new or saved messages for the Message Retention interval, and then delete them. • See Message Retention (page 121) for more. Voice Mail Message Send • See Record and Send a Message in this glossary. Voice Mail Message Storage Limit Sets how many messages a mailbox can store. • See Message Storage Limit (page 122) for more. Voice Mail Message Waiting Lamp An extension’s Message Waiting lamp flashes on the telephone indicating that they have new messages waiting in their mailbox. • See Message Waiting Lamp (page 122) for more. Voice Mail Multiple Company Greetings By assigning a unique Answer Table to each line, a single IntraMail system can provide individual greetings and dialing options for several companies. • See Multiple Company Greetings (page 122) for more. Automated Attendant Name • See Mailbox Name in this glossary. Voice Mail Next Call Routing Mailbox Provides callers with additional dialing options after they leave a message in an extension’s mailbox (depending on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Mode). • See Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 123) for more. Voice Mail One-Touch Forwarding • See Call Forward to a Mailbox and Message Forward in this glossary. Voice Mail One-Touch Mailbox Access • See Mailbox Logon in this glossary. Voice Mail One-Touch Mailbox Retrieval • See Mailbox Logon in this glossary. Voice Mail Personal Answering Machine Emulation • See Answering Machine Emulation in this glossary. Voice Mail Personalized Mailbox Greeting • See Greeting in this glossary. Voice Mail Programmable Security Code • See Security Code and Mailbox Security Code Delete in this glossary. Voice Mail Programming Voice Mail You can program (customize) IntraMail using the embedded telephone programming or the separately available System Administrator PC program. Limited programming can also be done from a System Administrator’s mailbox. • See Programming Voice Mail (page 127) for more. • Also see System Administrator Mailbox in this glossary. Maintenance Quick Message Automated Attendant callers can dial a digit followed by an extension number to leave a message directly in a user’s mailbox. • See Quick Message (page 127) for more. Automated Attendant Record and Send a Message A Subscriber Mailbox user can record and send a message to any other Subscriber Mailbox. • See Record and Send a Message (page 128) for more. Voice Mail Name Description Usage DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 93 IntraMail Features Recorded Help • Pre-recorded voice prompts guide the user through the IntraMail features. Voice Mail Recording a Conversation • See Conversation Record in this glossary. Voice Mail Recording a Message • See Record and Send a Message in this glossary. Voice Mail Recording Conversation Beep • See Conversation Record in this glossary. Voice Mail Recording Options • See Record and Send a Message in this glossary. Voice Mail Remote Log On • See Log Onto Voice Mail in this glossary. Voice Mail Remote Greetings • See Greeting in this glossary. Voice Mail Remote Message Notification • See Message Notification in this glossary. Voice Mail Remote Programming IntraMail programming is available remotely via the System Administrator PC program. • See Remote Programming (page 129) for more. Maintenance Return Call (with Caller ID) • See Make Call in this glossary. Voice Mail Rotary Dial Telephones • See Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers in this glossary. Automated Attendant Routing Mailbox A category of mailboxes normally used to route Automated Attendant calls. • See Routing Mailbox (page 129) for more. Automated Attendant Screened Transfer Similar to telephone system screened transfers in which the transferring party controls the transfer. • After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, IntraMail calls (screens) the destination extension to see if the transfer can go through. • If the destination is busy or in DND, the Automated Attendant doesn’t extend the call and immediately provides the caller with additional options. • If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the destination answers, the call goes through. If the destination doesn’t answer within a preset interval, the Automated Attendant doesn’t extend the call and provides the caller with additional options. • See Screened Transfer (page 129) for more. • Also see Unscreened Transfer in this glossary. Automated Attendant Security Code An extension user’s mailbox can have a security code to protect the mailbox from unauthorized access. • See Security Code (page 131) for more. • Also see Mailbox Security Code Delete in this glossary. Voice Mail Select Listen Mode • See Message Listen Mode in this glossary. Voice Mail Name Description Usage 94 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Single Digit Dialing An Automated Attendant caller can press a single key to route to an extension, route to another destination, or use an IntraMail feature. • See Single Digit Dialing (page 132) for more. Automated Attendant Subscriber Mailbox The mailbox type normally used for telephone system extensions. • Subscriber Mailbox (page 132)See for more. Voice Mail System Administrator The extension user that has IntraMail system administration capabilities. • See System Administrator (page 132) for more. Maintenance System Administrator Mailbox A Subscriber Mailbox option that enables the system administration capabilities. • See System Administrator Mailbox (page 133) for more. • Also see System Administrator in this glossary. Voice Mail System Reinitialization Reinitializing IntraMail returns all programmed options to their default values. • See System Re-initialization (page 133) for more. Maintenance Time and Date with Voice Mail Set the system Time and Date. • See Time and Date with Voice Mail (page 133) for more. • Also see Auto Time Stamp in this glossary. Voice Mail Time and Date Stamp With caller ID enabled, an extension can listen to a message and dial a code to hear the time the message was sent, as well as the caller’s number. • See Time and Date Stamp (page 134) for more. • Also see Caller ID with Return Call and Time and Date with Voice Mail in this glossary. Voice Mail Time and Date Stamp (with Caller ID Storage • See Time and Date Stamp in this glossary. Voice Mail Transfer by Extension • See Screened Transfer and Unscreened Transfer in this glossary. Automated Attendant Transfer Calls to a FAX Machine • See Fax Detection in this glossary. Automated Attendant Transfer to a Mailbox An extension user can transfer their active call to a coworker’s mailbox. • See Transfer to a Mailbox (page 134) for more. Voice Mail Transfer to a UCD Group The Automated Attendant can transfer outside callers to UCD Group master numbers. • See Transfer to a UCD Group (page 134) for more. Automated Attendant Transfer to an Extension See Screened Transfer and Unscreened Transfer in this glossary. Automated Attendant Transfer to the Automated Attendant • See Automated Attendant Transfer in this glossary. Voice Mail Name Description Usage DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 95 IntraMail Features Undefined Routing A dialpad digit for which the Automated Attendant has no routing defined. When an Automated Attendant caller dials a digit for which there is no routing assigned, Intra- Mail plays a brief error message and then repeats the dialing options. • See Undefined Routing (page 134) for more. Automated Attendant Undefined Routing Intercept • See Undefined Routing in this glossary. Automated Attendant Unscreened Transfer Similar to telephone system unscreened transfers in which the transferring party immediately extends the call. • After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, IntraMail immediately transfers the call to the destination and hangs up. Any recalls or additional routing are handled by the telephone system – just as with any other unscreened transfer. • See Unscreened Transfer (page 135) for more. • Also see Screened Transfer in this glossary. Automated Attendant Voice Mail Overflow Ensures that IntraMail will pick up calls that don’t go through. • See Voice Mail Overflow (page 136) for more. System Voice Prompting Messages IntraMail provides Voice Prompts that tell the extension user the status or progress of their call. • See Voice Prompting Messages (page 137) for more. System Volume Control with Voice Mail A mailbox user can turn the volume up or down while listening to their messages. • See Volume Control with Voice Mail (page 137) for more. Voice Mail Name Description Usage 96 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Announcement Mailbox An Announcement Mailbox plays a pre-recorded announcement to Automated Attendant callers without providing dialing options. The Announcement Mailbox is typically set up to provide information to callers (such as company directions) and then route back to the Automated Attendant. For example: ❥ The Automated Attendant instructs the caller to dial a digit (e.g., 1) for company directions. - Record this in the Instruction Menu message for the active Call Routing Mailbox. See Instruction Menu (page 112) for more. - Set the dialing options in the Dial Action Table associated with the active Call Routing Mailbox. See Dial Action Table (page 104) for more. ❥ The caller dials the digit and listens to the prerecorded Announcement Mailbox message for directions. ❥ After playing the directions, the caller routes back to the Automated Attendant for additional dialing options. Announcement Message The Announcement Message is the voice message that the System Administrator records for a specific Announcement Mailbox. Answer Schedule Override Answer Schedule Override provides alternate answering for Automated Attendant calls. When enabled, Answer Schedule Override sends calls to the specified Override Mailbox. The Override Mailbox can be an Announcement, Call Routing, or Subscriber mailbox. You can use Answer Schedule Override to provide holiday and bad weather closing announcements, for example. Enable override when you want callers to hear the special announcements; disable override to have the Automated Attendant answer normally. You can enable Answer Schedule Override from system programming or from the System Administrator Mailbox. ❥ If the Override Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox, the outside caller will hear the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed, IntraMail will then hang up, reroute the call, or provide additional dialing options. ❥ If the Override Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox, the outside caller will hear the instruction menu and can dial any options allowed by the associated Dial Action Table. ❥ If the Override Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message. Answer Tables The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. IntraMail provides 8 Answer Tables. The Answer Table is an integral part of the Automated Attendant. The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers.There are 3 major Automated Attendant components: ❥ Answer Tables The Answer Table (8 maximum) determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. The Answer Table divides the time of day and day of the week into individual schedules, which in turn assign a Call Rout- Play a pre-recorded announcement to callers. This is the message that the System Administrator records for an Announcement Mailbox. Enables an alternate greeting and alternate dialing options for callers. Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 97 IntraMail Features ing Mailbox to each call. When a specific schedule is not in effect, the Answer Table uses its Default Mailbox to determine routing. - By default, all lines use Answer Table 1. Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs Monday through Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. ❥ Call Routing Mailbox (page 102) A Call Routing Mailbox (16 maximum) is a mailbox associated with an individual Answer Table schedule or the Default Mailbox. It specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) are available to callers. It also provides the Instruction Menu to callers which typically greets the callers and describes the dialing options. ✔ By default, Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs Monday through Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. This schedule and the Default Mailbox both use Call Routing Mailbox 1. ❥ Dial Action Table (page 104) Once the Automated Attendant answers, the Dial Action Table (16 maximum) provides the dialing options to callers. Each digit a caller can dial is assigned a specific action (function) in the Dial Action Table. The dial action used depends on the setting in the active Call Routing Mailbox, which in turn depends on the Answer Table setup. ✔ By default, Call Routing Mailbox 1 uses Dial Action Table 1. The Default Mailbox and Routing Hierarchy The Default Mailbox provides routing for an Answer Table during periods when a schedule is not in effect. By default, for example, Answer Table 1 Schedule 1 is active Monday through Friday from 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM. The Default Mailbox for Answer Table 1 is active during all other times (i.e., evenings and weekends). Since Schedule 1 and the Default Mailbox both use Call Routing Mailbox 1, initially the routing is the same 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. See Customizing an Answer Table below for more. When setting up your Answer Tables, keep in mind that a more specific type of routing has priority over a less specific type of routing. When selecting which routing to follow when there is more than one choice for a specific time, IntraMail will choose in the following order: - Date Schedule - Day of Week Schedule - Range of Days Schedule - Default Mailbox For example, a Date Schedule set up for Christmas day will have priority over any other schedules in effect on December 25. Answering Machine Emulation A user’s keyset can work like a home answering machine. This lets IntraMail screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home. If activated, the extension’s incoming calls route to the user’s Subscriber Mailbox. Once the mailbox answers, the user hears two alert tones followed by the caller’s incoming message. The keyset user can then: ❥ Let the call go through to their mailbox, or ❥ Intercept the call. Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb, Automated Attendant calls to their extension go directly to their mailbox. Their phone will not ring for calls from the Automated Attendant. You can optionally enable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb from system programming. A subscriber typically turns on Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb when they need to work at their desk undisturbed by outside calls from the Automated Attendant. A keyset on the connected telephone system can work like a home answering machine. Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb sends Automated Attendant calls directly to an extension user’s mailbox. Their phone will not ring for calls from the Automated Attendant. 98 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Keep in mind that Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb will not block Intercom calls from co-workers or any other type of outside call not routed through the Automated Attendant. For example, with Automated Attendant Do Not Disturb enabled, Direct Inwards Lines and transferred outside calls to an extension work normally. Auto Erase or Save When a mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits their mailbox, IntraMail will either automatically save or erase the message. The setting of this option depends on how the subscriber would prefer their mailbox to operate. When set to erase, the subscriber can review their messages and retain only those they specifically save using the SA option. This is a good choice for a subscriber that receives frequent unessential messages. When set to save, the subscriber has the assurance of knowing that every message they listened to was saved in their mailbox. This is a good choice for those that must carefully review and consider each new message. Handling Partially Reviewed Messages When listening to multiple new messages when Auto Erase or Save is set to Save: ❥ Any message to which you partially listen is automatically saved. ❥ Any message to which you hang up during or do not listen is retained as a new message. For example, if you have three new messages, listen to part of message 1, dial L to hear part of message 2 and then hang up, IntraMail automatically: ❥ Saves message 1. ❥ Retains messages 2 and 3 as new messages. ❥ Restarts the flashing ring/message lamp. ❥ Resets the telephone display to V-MAIL 02 (VM02). When listening to multiple new messages when Auto Erase or Save is set to Erase: ❥ Any message to which you partially listen is automatically erased. ❥ Any message to which you hang up during or do not listen is retained as a new message. For example, if you have three new messages, listen to part of message 1, dial L to hear part of message 2 and then hang up, IntraMail automatically: ❥ Erases message 1. ❥ Retains messages 2 and 3 as new messages. ❥ Restarts the flashing ring/message lamp. ❥ Resets the telephone display to V-MAIL 02 (VM02). Auto Time Stamp After a Subscriber Mailbox user listens to a message, IntraMail can optionally announce the time and date the message was left. The Subscriber can enable Auto Time Stamp from their mailbox, or you can optionally enable it from system programming. Auto Time Stamp helps if the subscriber needs to know the time and date of each message they receive without taking any extra steps. With Auto Time Stamp turned on, Intra- Mail automatically announces the date, time, and (optionally) the caller’s number at the end of each message. With Auto Time Stamp turned off, the subscriber must dial TI while listening to a message to get the same information. When a mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits their mailbox, IntraMail will either save or erase the message. Automatically hear the time and date a message was left. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 99 IntraMail Features Automated Attendant The Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers. There are 3 major components: ❥ Answer Tables (page 96) The Answer Table (8 maximum) determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. The Answer Table divides the time of day and day of the week into individual schedules, which in turn assign a Call Routing Mailbox to each call. When a specific schedule is not in effect, the Answer Table uses its Default Mailbox to determine routing. - By default, all lines use Answer Table 1. Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs Monday through Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. ❥ Call Routing Mailbox (page 102) A Call Routing Mailbox (16 maximum) is a mailbox associated with an individual Answer Table schedule or the Default Mailbox. It specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) are available to callers. It also provides the Instruction Menu to callers which typically greets the callers and describes the dialing options. - By default, Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs Monday through Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. This schedule and the Default Mailbox both use Call Routing Mailbox 1. ❥ Dial Action Table (page 104) Once the Automated Attendant answers, the Dial Action Table (16 maximum) provides the dialing options to callers. Each digit a caller can dial is assigned a specific action (function) in the Dial Action Table. The dial action used depends on the setting in the active Call Routing Mailbox, which in turn depends on the Answer Table setup. - By default, Call Routing Mailbox 1 uses Dial Action Table 1. Automatically answers the telephone system’s incoming calls, plays an Instruction Menu message, and provides dialing options to callers. For a built-in call answering capability when IntraMail is not installed, see Automated Attendant, Built-In (page 100). DIL to Voice Mail Master (700) Lines Route to Answer Table 1 Answer Table 1 Schedule 1 or Default Mailbox Dial Action Table 1 ● 3131-02: Answer Table ● 421x-Answer Table Calls always route to Call Routing Mailbox 001 - Schedule 1 active M-F 8:30AM-5:00PM. - Default Mailbox active all other times. ● 423x: Dial Action Tables Dial Action Table 1 Dialing Options Dial an extension number, or 0 for the operator Automated Attendant Answering (Default) All Lines Use Answer Table 1 Which Chooses Call Routing Mailbox 001. And Dial Action Table 1 With these dialing options Automated Attendant V-MAIL + SA + I + 001 Built-In Automated Attendant #AG + 001 ● 422x: Routing Mailboxes (001) ● 3112-01: Direct Termination (Day) ● 3112-04: Direct Termination (Night) Call Routing Mailbox 001 ● 4212: Schedule ● 4211-01: Default Mailbox To record a new Instruction Menu Message (from Extension 300): 100 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Automated Attendant, Built-In The Built-In Automated Attendant gives the system call answering and routing capabilities when IntraMail is not installed. The Built-In Automated Attendant can use any of the first eight Call Routing Mailboxes (001-008) for call handling, and each of these eight Routing Mailboxes can have a 30 second Instruction Menu message (Attendant Greeting). The Routing Mailboxes must be Call Routing Mailboxes, and all other Routing Mailbox types are ignored. Additionally, the Built-In Automated Attendant provides two voice mail ports, allowing it to process two calls simultaneously. The Built-In Automated Attendant does not provide voice mail. Just like the full featured IntraMail Automated Attendant, the Built-In Automated Attendant can answer outside calls on each line according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. After answering, the Built-In Automated Attendant plays an Instruction Menu message (greeting) to the caller and provides them with dialing options. There are 3 major Automated Attendant components: Automated Attendant Transfer An extension user can transfer their outside call to the Automated Attendant so the outside caller can use the Automated Attendant dialing options. This helps an outside caller, for example, that wants to return to the Automated Attendant so they can dial another co-worker or use a different Automated Attendant option. Automatic Routing for Rotrary Dial Callers If an Automated Attendant caller doesn’t dial any digits, IntraMail will automatically route them to a specified option (such as the operator or a mailbox). This lets rotary telephone users stay on the line to leave a message or have their call processed. Without Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers, rotary callers would not be able to use the Automated Attendant. Automatic Routing for Rotrary Dial Callers Bilingual Voice Prompts provides IntraMail voice prompts in one of two active languages (primary and secondary). These language choices are available to Routing Mailboxes, outside lines, Station Mailboxes, and Group Mailboxes as follows: ❥ Routing Mailbox The language an Automated Attendant caller hears is set by the answering Routing Mailbox. ❥ Outside Line For outside lines not answered by the Automated Attendant, the language the caller hears if routed to voice mail is set by the line. An outgoing outside call also hears the line’s language setting if it is then transferred to a co-worker’s mailbox. ❥ Station Mailbox When you log onto your own mailbox and use its features, you always hear your mailbox language. If you call a co-worker and leave a message, you will hear the system’s Primary Language. Provides built-in call answering capability when IntraMail is not installed. For the full-featured IntraMail Automated Attendant that automatically answers incoming calls, plays an Instruction Menu message, and provides dialing options to callers, see Automated Attendant (page 99). While on an outside call, an extension user can transfer their call to the Automated Attendant for additional dialing options. Automatically route Automated Attendant callers that don’t dial any digits to a specified option. Provides IntraMail voice prompts in one of two active languages. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 101 IntraMail Features ❥ Group Mailbox and UCD Group Mailbox Similar to a Station Mailbox, when you log into a Group or UCD Group Mailbox and use its features, you always hear the language programmed for that mailbox. If a co-worker leaves a message in the Group Mailbox, they hear the system’s Primary Language. There are up to six languages stored in the IntraMail CompactFlash card. By default, English mnemonic and English numeric are active and the other four languages (if any) are inactive. You activate an inactive language through system programming. Automated Attendant callers can optionally dial a digit to select the language of their choice. Call Forward to a Mailbox A subscriber can easily forward calls to their Subscriber Mailbox. Instead of dialing an extension as the forwarding destination, the user just presses their V-MAIL key instead. With Call Forward to a Mailbox, the subscriber is assured that their calls don’t get forgotten when they are busy or unavailable. Unlike with Extension Hunting to Voice Mail, forwarding lets the subscriber choose when and how they want their unanswered calls to go to voice mail (rather than have the telephone system reroute their calls automatically). Call Forwarding a Subscriber’s Direct Inward Line to their Mailbox The following table describes how IntraMail handles a subscriber’s Direct Inward Line when it is Call Forwarded to their mailbox. The routing occurs when the caller dials a digit while listening to the recorded or default mailbox greeting. An extension user can forward their calls to their mailbox. Dialing Options while Listening to a Subscriber Mailbox Greeting Next Call Routing Mailbox Dialing Option Digit Dialed Action Undefined No 0 Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and the greeting repeats, and the caller is prompted to leave a message. 1-9 # IntraMail hangs up. * Caller skips greeting and can immediately start recording. 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) No 0 Caller follows 0 action in Next Call Routing Mailbox. 1-9 Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” the greeting repeats, and the caller is prompted to leave a message. # Caller routes to the Next Call Routing Mailbox and hears its Instruction Menu. * Caller skips greeting and can immediately start recording. 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) Yes 0 Caller follows key’s action in Next Call Rout- 1-9 ing Mailbox. # Caller routes to the Next Call Routing Mailbox and hears its Instruction Menu. * Caller skips greeting and can immediately start recording. 102 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Call Routing Mailbox The Call Routing Mailbox, associated with an Answer Table, specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers. By default, IntraMail provides 8 Call Routing Mailboxes (1-8). However, you can assign any of the 16 Routing Mailboxes as a Call Routing Mailbox. The Call Routing Mailbox is an integral part of the Automated Attendant. The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers. There are 3 major Automated Attendant components: ❥ Answer Tables (page 96) The Answer Table (8 maximum) determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. The Answer Table divides the time of day and day of the week into individual schedules, which in turn assign a Call Routing Mailbox to each call. When a specific schedule is not in effect, the Answer Table uses its Default Mailbox to determine routing. - By default, all lines use Answer Table 1. Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs Monday through Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. ❥ Call Routing Mailbox A Call Routing Mailbox (16 maximum) is a mailbox associated with an individual Answer Table schedule or the Default Mailbox. It specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) are available to callers. It also provides the Instruction Menu to callers which typically greets the callers and describes the dialing options. - By default, Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs Monday through Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. This schedule and the Default Mailbox both use Call Routing Mailbox 1. ❥ Dial Action Table (page 104) Once the Automated Attendant answers, the Dial Action Table (16 maximum) provides the dialing options to callers. Each digit a caller can dial is assigned a specific action (function) in the Dial Action Table. The dial action used depends on the setting in the active Call Routing Mailbox, which in turn depends on the Answer Table setup. - By default, Call Routing Mailbox 1 uses Dial Action Table 1. Call Screening Call Screening allows a display keyset extension user to listen to (screen) a voice mail message as it is being left in their mailbox. Call Screening emulates a standard home answering machine — in addition to providing more control when handling incoming messages. Similar to Personal Answering Machine Emulation, the extension user can listen as the message is being left, intercept the call, or end the screen and have the message recorded privately. Unlike Personal Answering Machine emulation, Call Screening does not require the extension user to forward their calls immediately to voice mail. The telephone display automatically shows the Call Screening soft key options as soon as the recording begins. When enabled, Call Screening will broadcast the caller’s message as soon as the mailbox Greeting completes. Additionally, if the extension user intercepts (answers) the screened call, the first portion of the message is automatically erased from the extension’s mailbox. Any caller that can leave a message can have their call screened by the extension user. Call Screening and Group Mailboxes If extensions share a Group Mailbox, any number of extensions in the group can screen an incoming message. The group extensions can monitor the incoming message simultaneously. If any group member answers the call (i.e., intercepts the incoming message), the remaining group members are immediately disconnected. The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies the dialing options and announcements for Automated Attendant callers. Users can screen (listen to) voice mail messages as they are being left in their mailbox. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 103 IntraMail Features Automatic Call Screening With Automatic Call Screening enabled, an extension will immediately screen (broadcast) an incoming message as soon as the caller starts to leave it in the extension’s mailbox. The extension user hears two beeps followed by the caller’s voice. Caller ID and Voice Mail Caller ID is a telephone company service that provides an extension with a caller’s number and optional name. With Caller ID, the keyset user knows who’s calling before they pick up the call. Caller ID Logging stores a record of the call on the user’s telephone which they can review and use to easily return the call. When used with IntraMail, Caller ID enables the Make Call feature for outside calls. After listening to a voice message, the subscriber can dial MC to return the call without knowing the callers phone number. Calling the Automated Attendant Automated Attendant callers can use various IntraMail features and then return to the Automated Attendant for additional dialing options. This lets the caller dial other extensions, leave messages for co-workers, or use other Automated Attendant features. The features below describe several ways to return to the Automated Attendant. ❥ Automated Attendant Transfer (page 100) An extension user can transfer their outside call to the Automated Attendant so the outside caller can use the Automated Attendant dialing options. ❥ Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 123) The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides callers with additional dialing options after they leave a message in a mailbox (depending on the setting of the Dialing Option). Centrex Transfer Centrex Transfer is a Dial Action Table option that can transfer an Automated Attendant call from a Centrex line to an outside number using the features of that Centrex line. With Centrex Transfer, the Automated Attendant answers an outside call and then transfers the caller back to the telco using the same line on which the call initially rang. To set this up, assign a Dial Action Table action as a UTRF to a System Speed Dial bin (e.g., #201P). The bin should contain the complete dial string (preceded by a Flash command) required to initiate the Centrex Transfer. When the Automated Attendant answers, the caller dials the digit and IntraMail automatically routes them to the outside number. Centrex Transfer is only available if the telephone system connects to Centrex lines that provide the features required to complete the transfer. Similar to External Transfer, Centrex Transfer allows your callers to easily reach branch offices and important off-site associates. Unlike External Transfer, Centrex Transfer requires unique telco features. - Conversation Record Conversation Record allows a subscriber to record their active call as a new message in their mailbox, which they can review later on. Conversation Record can be helpful when an extension user is on a call that A telephone company service that provides a caller’s number and optional name. Outside callers can return to the Automated Attendant for additional dialing options. The Automated Attendant can transfer a caller from a Centrex line to an outside number using the features of that Centrex line. Allows an extension user to record their active call as a message in their mailbox. 104 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description involves a lot of detail (such as a technical discussion or extensive directions). Rather than taking notes as the call progresses, the user can record the conversation and carefully review it later on. IntraMail broadcasts a beep and a voice prompt to the callers as Conversation Record begins. After calling their mailbox, the subscriber can save, edit, or delete the recorded conversation. Conversation Record Key for a Co-worker’s Mailbox Your extension or DSS Console can have Conversation Record keys for co-worker’s mailboxes. While on a call, you can press the key to record your conversation directly into a co-worker’s mailbox. You can set up the key to record into any valid Subscriber Mailbox (including Group Mailboxes programmed as Subscriber Mailboxes). This could help a dispatcher, for example, that wants to record a conversation with a client right into the responsible technician’s mailbox. Your extension can have multiple Conversation Record keys, each associated with a different mailbox. Dial Action Table The Dial Action Table defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer Table, which in turn provides those dialing options to Automated Attendant callers. IntraMail provides 16 Dial Action Tables. The Dial Action Table is an integral part of the Automated Attendant. The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers. There are 3 major Automated Attendant components: ■ Answer Tables (page 96) The Answer Table (8 maximum) determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. The Answer Table divides the time of day and day of the week into individual schedules, which in turn assign a Call Routing Mailbox to each call. When a specific schedule is not in effect, the Answer Table uses its Default Mailbox to determine routing. - By default, all lines use Answer Table 1. Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs Monday through Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. ■ Call Routing Mailbox (page 102) A Call Routing Mailbox (16 maximum) is a mailbox associated with an individual Answer Table schedule or the Default Mailbox. It specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) are available to callers. It also provides the Instruction Menu to callers which typically greets the callers and describes the dialing options. - By default, Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs Monday through Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM. This schedule and the Default Mailbox both use Call Routing Mailbox 1. ■ Dial Action Table Once the Automated Attendant answers, the Dial Action Table (16 maximum) provides the dialing options to callers. Each digit a caller can dial is assigned a specific action (function) in the Dial Action Table. The dial action used depends on the setting in the active Call Routing Mailbox, which in turn depends on the Answer Table setup. - By default, Call Routing Mailbox 1 uses Dial Action Table 1. Caution The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or record telephone conversations or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to a telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or requiring the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties. Defines the dialing options for Automated Attendant callers. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 105 IntraMail Features Directory Dialing Directory Dialing allows an Automated Attendant caller to reach an extension by dialing the first few letters in the extension user’s name. With Directory Dialing, the caller does not have to remember the extension number of the person they wish to reach — just their name. Here’s how Directory Dialing works: 1. When the Automated Attendant answers, it sends the call to a Directory Dialing Mailbox. (Optionally, the caller may be asked to dial a digit to access Directory Dialing.) 2. The Directory Dialing Mailbox plays the Directory Dialing Message (recorded by the System Administrator) which asks the caller to dial letters for the name of the person they wish to reach. 3. The caller dials the letters for the person’s name plus #. They can dial by first name or last name, depending on how the Directory Dialing Message was recorded and the Directory Dialing Mailbox was set up. 4. IntraMail searches the list of programmed extension names for a match of the caller-entered letters. 5. Voice prompts announce the first three matches, and allow the caller to dial a digit (1-3) to reach one of the announced matches. Additionally, the caller can dial 4 to hear additional matches (if any). 6. The caller dials the digit for the extension they wish to reach, and IntraMail sends the call to that extension. The call is sent as a Screened or Unscreened transfer, depending on programming. For callers to use Directory Dialing, the system must have a name programmed for each extension (up to 18 characters, A-Z, using upper and lower case letters). Each extension should also have a name recorded in their Subscriber Mailbox. In addition, each extension used by Directory Dialing must be installed and must have their Subscriber Mailbox active (Personal or Group). Directory Dialing Mailbox A Directory Dialing Mailbox is the Routing Mailbox type required to implement Directory Dialing. See Directory Dialing (page 105) for more on how to set up a Directory Dialing Mailbox. Erasing All Messages The System Administrator can delete all messages in a Subscriber Mailbox. Erasing All Messages is an administrator’s maintenance tool. The administrator may need to use this tool if an employee has left the company or has an excessive number of messages stored in their mailbox. By deleting the unwanted messages, the administrator can prevent the IntraMail recording capacity from being reached (which would disable many of the IntraMail messaging features). Exiting a Mailbox A Subscriber Mailbox user can exit their mailbox by dialing a code or by hanging up. After exiting, the subscriber can use their extension for normal call processing. An Automated Attendant caller to reach an extension by dialing the first few letters in the extension user’s name. The mailbox type required for Directory Dialing. Lets the System Administrator delete mailbox messages system-wide. Exit your mailbox by dialing a code or by hanging up. 106 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Extension Hunting to Voice Mail automatically sends calls to an extension’s mailbox without the user having to set up Call Forwarding. For example, Extension Hunting to Voice Mail can send unanswered transferred calls to an extension’s mailbox rather than recalling the transferring party. In addition, Extension Hunting to Voice Mail can send an unanswered Direct Inward Line to the extension’s mailbox instead of diverting to Key Ring. Hunting can also reroute calls from the Automated Attendant as well as ringing Intercom calls (depending on the hunt type). Unlike Call Forwarding, Extension Hunting to Voice Mail requires no action by the extension user to redirect calls; the system reroutes them automatically. There are 4 types of Extension Hunting to Voice Mail: ❥ Ring No Answer Line (Type 1) Type 1 hunting reroutes outside calls to the extension’s mailbox after a preset interval. Type 1 hunting reroutes outside calls when the extension is idle, busy, or in Do Not Disturb but does not reroute ringing or voice-announced Intercom calls. See the Routing Charts below for more. ❥ Ring No Answer / Busy Line (Type 2) Type 2 hunting also reroutes outside calls to the extension user’s mailbox. When the extension is idle, Type 2 hunting reroutes calls after an interval. Type 2 hunting reroutes outside calls immediately while the extension is busy or in Do Not Disturb. Like Type 1 hunting, Type 2 hunting does not reroute ringing or voice-announced Intercom calls. See the Routing Charts below for more. ❥ Ring No Answer / Busy All (Type 3) Type 3 hunting reroutes outside calls and ringing Intercom calls. If the extension is idle, calls reroute to the user’s mailbox after an interval. Type 3 hunting reroutes calls immediately when the extension is busy or in Do Not Disturb. It does not reroute voice-announced Intercom calls.See the Routing Charts below for more. ❥ Busy Line (Type 4) Type 4 hunting is similar to Type 2 hunting except that transferred outside calls to an idle extension do not reroute. Transferred outside calls, Direct Inward Lines, and calls from the Automated Attendant go immediately to the mailbox when the extension is busy or in Do Not Disturb. This type of hunting never reroutes ringing or voice-announced Intercom calls. See the Routing Charts below for more. Notes: ❥ Extension Hunting to Voice Mail does not reroute voice-announced Intercom calls. ❥ Extension Hunting to Voice Mail does not reroute Key Ring calls. See Key Ring (page 51) for more. External Transfer External Transfer allows an Automated Attendant caller to automatically route to an outside telephone number. This requires a Dial Action Table actionassigned as a UTRF to a System Speed Dial bin (e.g., #201 + Pause for system bin 201). When the Automated Attendant answers, the caller dials the digit and IntraMail automatically routes them to the outside number contained in the bin. Similar to Centrex Transfer, External Transfer allows your callers to easily reach branch offices and important off-site associates. Unlike Centrex Transfer, External Transfer does not require unique telco features. Automatically sends unanswered calls to an extension’s mailbox. An Automated Attendant caller can automatically route to an outside telephone number. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 107 IntraMail Features Fax Detection The Automated Attendant can detect incoming fax calls and transfer them to a fax machine. With Fax Detection enabled, after the Automated Attendant answers a call it listens for incoming fax CNG tone. If it detects the tone, it does an unscreened transfer of the call to the specified company fax machine. The incoming fax then prints out on the company fax machine. If you disable Fax Detection, the Automated Attendant will not detect and route incoming fax calls. Flexible Answering Schedules The Automated Attendant can answer outside calls with different announcements and dialing options, depending on the time of day and day of week. For example, a company can set up separate schedules for weekdays, evenings, weekends, and specific holidays. Each schedule can play a different announcement to callers, as well as provide them with unique dialing options. Once set up in programming, the schedule operation is automatic. The Flexible Answering Schedules are determined by the set up of the IntraMail Answer Tables. See Answer Tables (page 96) for more. Flexible Call Routing The Automated Attendant can provide outside callers with a wide variety of dialing (routing) options. You can customize the announcements and routing options to exactly meet the site requirements. Use Flexible Call Routing to eliminate or minimize the need for an operator or receptionist to handle outside calls. There are 3 components to Flexible Call Routing. ❥ Answer Tables (page 96) Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. ❥ Call Routing Mailbox (page 102) The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) and announcement are available to Automated Attendant callers. ❥ Dial Action Table (page 104) Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer Table, which in turn provides those dialing options to Automated Attendant callers. Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan If the telephone system extension numbers are changed or swapped, IntraMail will automatically change the Subscriber Mailbox numbers to match. There is no extensive reprogramming required. After the swap, all of the subscriber’s messages and options are available at their new extension number. Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan lets you customize a site’s extension numbers and be assured that IntraMail will automatically adapt to the new configuration. Two-digit mailboxes are not supported in IntraMail. Automatically transfer incoming fax calls to a fax machine. The Automated Attendant can answer outside calls with different announcements and dialing options, depending on the time of day and day of week. Provides outside callers with a wide variety of dialing (routing) options. If telephone extension numbers are customized, set up IntraMail mailbox numbers to match. 108 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Forced Unscreened Transfer A Subscriber Mailbox can optionally convert Automated Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened Transfers. Enable this option for a mailbox if the subscriber prefers to receive all calls sent by the Automated Attendant as Unscreened Transfers. With Unscreened Transfers, ❥ Calls from the Automated Attendant ring like other transferred calls and display the incoming Caller ID data (if provided by telco and enabled in programming) as the call is ringing. ❥ As with Screened Transfers, unanswered calls route to the subscriber’s greeting (recorded or default) so the caller can leave a message. However, with Unscreened Transfer the caller cannot dial 2 to reach the Next Call Routing Mailbox options (if programmed). Getting Recorded Help If a Subscriber Mailbox user dials an incorrect code or forgets what to dial while in their mailbox, they can request help from the IntraMail voice prompts. Recorded Help provides the user with a built-in, interactive user’s guide. To get recorded help, the user dials 0. Go to a Mailbox An Automated Attendant caller can dial a digit to route to a Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox. This is called the Go To (GOTO) action. The GOTO action can route directly to a specific Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox, or allow the Automated Attendant caller to go to a mailbox of their own choosing. Use the GOTO action to set up a “tree” of Automated Attendant options. The block diagram below shows how the Automated Attendant can provide the caller with a “tree” of dialing options. Dialing 1 (GOTO 9) routes to Announcement Mailbox 9, which plays the company directions. Dialing 2 (GOTO 1) routes to Call Routing Mailbox 2, which is set up to give the caller single-digit dialing to Tech Service technicians. ❥ The Announcement Message for Announcement Mailbox 9 tells the caller how to locate the company. Automatically converts Automated Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened Transfers. Request help from the IntraMail voice prompts. An Automated Attendant caller can dial a digit and route directly into a mailbox. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 109 IntraMail Features ❥ The Instruction Menu for Call Routing Mailbox 1 instructs the caller which digits to dial for each technician. The Dial Action Table for Call Routing Mailbox 2 contains the STRF or UTRF actions to each technician’s extension. The GOTO action can also log into a Subscriber Mailbox, although the LOGON action is normally reserved for this function. Greeting A Subscriber Mailbox user can record a personalized greeting for their mailbox. Caller’s to the user’s mailbox hear the prerecorded personalized greeting rather than a default message. The greeting can announce the subscriber’s name, provide a personal message (such as “Hello - I am on vacation this week”), or instruct the caller how to leave a message or use other mailbox options. A greeting that provides mailbox instructions is very helpful if the mailbox has a Next Call Routing Mailbox set up that provides additional dialing options. Without the greeting, the caller would not know which digits to dial. If a greeting has not been recorded, a caller leaving a message in the subscriber mailbox will hear, “At the tone, you can leave your message for (extension number or name).” While listening to a mailbox greeting, a caller can dial * to immediately leave a message. Multiple Greetings A subscriber can record up to three personalized greetings for their mailbox and make any one of the three active. Callers to the user’s mailbox hear the active greeting rather than a default message. When a caller leaves a message in the subscriber’s mailbox, they hear the active greeting. This allows the subscriber, for example, to record separate greetings for work hours, after work, and during vacation. Instead of rerecording their greeting when they leave the office, they can just activate the “after work” greeting instead. Remote Greetings A Subscriber Mailbox user can call into the Automated Attendant, access their mailbox, and remotely record their mailbox greeting. Following are two of the ways a user can do this: ❥ After the Automated Attendant answers, dial a digit (typically #) followed by their mailbox number. This method allows outside callers to log into their Subscriber Mailboxes from outside the company. Once they log into their mailbox, the user can dial G to record a greeting. A user can record a Greeting for their mailbox callers to hear. 1 2 Automated Attendant Announcement Mailbox 9 Call Routing Mailbox 2 GOTO 9 GOTO 2 Call Routing Mailbox 1 Company Directions Tech Service Technicians 110 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description ❥ If an extension has a Direct Inward Line that is forwarded to voice mail, the caller can dial # and log into their mailbox (instead of leaving a message). Once they log into their mailbox, the user can dial G to record a greeting. This option must be set up in the Next Call Routing Mailbox. Group Mailbox Ring Group Mailbox Group (Shared) Mailbox A Group Mailbox is a Ring Group Mailbox shared by a group of co-workers. It is normally a Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller leaves a message at any extension within the group that shares the mailbox, the system stores the message in the shared Group Mailbox. The Ring/Message lamp at all keyset extensions in the group flashes to indicate that there is a new voice mail message waiting. Any extension user in the group can log onto their mailbox to hear and process the shared message. The message count on all keyset displays increments and decrements as group messages are received, listened to, or deleted. Any extension sharing a Group Mailbox can record and activate the Greeting and set Automated Attendant Do Not Disturb. The system automatically uses the most recent Greeting, regardless of which member of the group recorded it. Group Mailboxes are helpful in both residential installations and larger business workgroups, since extensions share a common voice mailbox. Messages in the Group Mailbox can be listened to, forwarded, deleted, and otherwise processed by any member of the group. Group Mailbox uses Ring Group programming. You can separately set up Ring Group members to have the same Ring Group Mailbox. Since the system provides 8 Ring Groups, there are a total of 8 Ring Group Mailboxes available. The Ring Group Mailbox can optionally be a Routing Mailbox (see Understanding Mailbox Types below). Mailbox for a Ring Group A Ring Group Mailbox can also be the mailbox for a “stand-alone” Ring Group in which the members do not share the mailbox, but have personal mailboxes instead. The following types of unanswered calls route to this type of Ring Group Mailbox: ❥ Outside calls transferred to the Ring Group master number. ❥ Automated Attendant transfers (UTRF or STRF) to the Ring Group master number. ❥ Direct Inward Lines to the Ring Group master number (see page 136). UCD Group Mailbox If a UCD Group is set to overflow to voice mail, an unanswered call into the group is picked up by the UCD Group Mailbox. The UCD Group Mailbox can be a Subscriber Mailbox (to allow the caller to leave a message) or a Routing Mailbox (to provide additional dialing options or an announcement). See Understanding Mailbox Types below. Understanding Group Mailbox Types If the Group Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox (1): ❥ The Group Mailbox has all the features of any other personal Subscriber Mailbox. If the Group Mailbox redirects to a Call Routing Mailbox (2): ❥ A co-worker attempting to leave a message at an extension assigned to the Group Mailbox hears: “Your call cannot go through. Goodbye.” IntraMail then hangs up. ❥ An outside caller attempting to leave a message at an extension assigned to the Group Mailbox hears the prerecorded Instruction Menu message and can dial options allowed by the associated Dial Action Table. Subscribers in the same group can share a mailbox. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 111 IntraMail Features ❥ If the Group Mailbox user presses V-MAIL, they are asked to enter their mailbox number. After entering the number, they hear, “That mailbox does not exist.” ❥ An Automated Attendant caller attempting to leave a Quick Message or do a Remote Logon at an extension assigned to the Group mailbox hears, “That mailbox does not exist.” They then return to the Automated Attendant. If the Group Mailbox redirects to an Announcement Mailbox (2): ❥ A co-worker attempting to leave a message at an extension assigned to the Group Mailbox hears: “Your call cannot go through. Goodbye.” IntraMail then hangs up. ❥ An outside caller attempting to leave a message at an extension assigned to the Group Mailbox hears the prerecorded announcement and can use all other Announcement Mailbox features. ❥ If the Group Mailbox user presses V-MAIL, they are asked to enter their mailbox number. After entering the number, they hear: “That mailbox does not exist.” ❥ An Automated Attendant caller attempting to leave a Quick Message or do a Remote Logon at an extension assigned to the Group mailbox hears, “That mailbox does not exist.” They then return to the Automated Attendant. If the Group Mailbox redirects to a Directory Dialing Mailbox (2): ❥ A co-worker attempting to leave a message at an extension assigned to the Group Mailbox hears: “Your call cannot go through. Goodbye.” IntraMail then hangs up. ❥ An outside caller attempting to leave a message at an extension assigned to the Group Mailbox hears the Directory Dialing message and can use any of the options programmed for the Directory Dialing Mailbox. ❥ If the Group Mailbox user presses V-MAIL, they are asked to enter their mailbox number. After entering the number, they hear: “That mailbox does not exist.” ❥ An Automated Attendant caller attempting to leave a Quick Message or do a Remote Logon at an extension assigned to the Group mailbox hears, “That mailbox does not exist.” They then return to the Automated Attendant. - Skip this step for a “stand-alone” Ring Group. Guest Mailbox An outside party can have their own Guest Mailbox mailbox for receiving and sending messages. A Guest Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox that does not have an extension associated with it. A Guest Mailbox has many of the IntraMail features of a Subscriber Mailbox. A company visitor with a Guest Mailbox could, for example: ❥ Go to any extension, press INTERCOM + 700, then dial their mailbox number. ❥ Review their messages, leave messages for associates, or record a new greeting for their mailbox. ❥ Use many other features available to a Subscriber Mailbox. Voice mail routes calls to the Guest Mailbox in the following three ways: ❥ A Screened Transfer (STRF) or Unscreened Transfer (UTRF) from the Automated Attendant goes directly to the Guest Mailbox, even though there is no extension installed. ❥ An Intercom call to the uninstalled extension goes directly to the Guest Mailbox. ❥ A transferred call to the uninstalled extension also goes directly to the Guest Mailbox. Hang Up Hang Up is an Automated Attendant option that immediately hangs up the outside call. When setting up a Dial Action Table, you may want to use Hang Up for unused actions (rather than the caller hearing the standard error message). You might also want to use the Hang Up action as the Timeout destination for callers that wait too long to dial after the Automated Attendant answers. An outside party can have their own mailbox for receiving and sending messages. An Automated Attendant option that immediately hangs up the outside call. 112 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Instruction Menu The Instruction Menu is the announcement that plays to Automated Attendant callers. Normally, the Instruction Menu greets callers and provides them with the Automated Attendant dialing options. The Instruction Menu is associated with the active Call Routing Mailbox. Normally, you should have the System Administrator customize (rerecord) the Instruction Menu to match the dialing options enabled in the site’s Dial Action Table. If a custom Instruction Menu is not recorded, the Automated Attendant callers hear: “Thank you for calling. If you are calling from a touch tone phone, please dial the extension number you wish to reach, or dial 0 for assistance. If you are calling from a rotary dial phone, please stay on the line for assistance.” Leaving a Message An extension user or outside caller can leave a voice message in a co-worker’s mailbox if that extension is busy, unanswered, or in Do Not Disturb. Leaving a voice message is a handy and efficient way to communicate with co-workers that avoids post-it notes, message pads, and unnecessary email. Additional Options While Leaving a Message The following chart shows the additional dialing options a caller may have while listening to the mailbox greeting prior to leaving a message. What happens depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing and Dialing Option options. Play an announcement to outside callers announcing the Automated Attendant dialing options. Leave a voice message in a mailbox from inside or outside the company. Dialing Options While Leaving a Message Next Call Routing Mailbox Dialing Option Digit Dialed Action Outside Call Intercom Call Undefined No 0 Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and the 1-9 greeting repeats. # IntraMail hangs up. * Caller skips greeting and can immediately start recording. 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) No 0 Caller follows 0 action in Next Call Routing Mailbox. Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and the greeting repeats. 1-9 Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and the greeting repeats. # Caller routes to the Next Call Routing Mailbox and hears its Instruction Menu. IntraMail hangs up. * Caller skips greeting and can immediately start recording. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 113 IntraMail Features Listening to Messages While or after listening to a message, a Subscriber Mailbox user has many message handling options from which to choose. The listening options let you quickly and efficiently manage your voice mail messages, respond to the message sender, or forward the message to a co-worker for additional handling. The following table shows these options. 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) Yes 0 Caller follows key’s action in Next Call Routing Mailbox. Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and the greeting repeats. 1-9 # Caller routes to the Next Call Routing Mailbox and hears its Instruction Menu. IntraMail hangs up. * Caller skips greeting and can immediately start recording. While or after listening to a message, an extension user has many message handling options from which to choose. Message Listen Options [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Option Description RE (73) [Reply] - [N/A] • Record a reply. MF (63) [Forward] - [N/A] • Forward the message to another mailbox. MC (62) [Callback] - [N/A] • Make a call to the message sender. TI (84) • Hear the time and date the message was sent. SA (72) Save the message in your mailbox. E (3) [Erase] - [Erase] • Erase the message. L (5) [Next Message] - [Next] Listen to the next message. B (2) Back up a few seconds. BB (22) [Repeat] - [Rpt] Back up to the beginning of the message. G (4) Go ahead a few seconds. * Pause/resume listening. 1N (16) [Message List + New Messages] - [N/A] • Select New Message List 1S (17) [Message List + Saved Messages] - [N/ A] • Select Saved Message List 1A (12) [Message List + All Messages] - [N/A] • Select All Message List # [Exit] - [Exit] Exit the listen mode. Dialing Options While Leaving a Message Next Call Routing Mailbox Dialing Option Digit Dialed Action Outside Call Intercom Call 114 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Handling Partially Reviewed Messages When listening to multiple new messages when Auto Erase or Save is set to Save: ❥ Any message to which you partially listen is automatically saved. ❥ Any message to which you hang up during or do not listen is retained as a new message. For example, if you have three new messages, listen to part of message 1, dial L to hear part of message 2 and then hang up, IntraMail automatically: ❥ Saves message 1. ❥ Retains messages 2 and 3 as new messages. ❥ Restarts the flashing ring/message lamp. ❥ Resets the telephone display to V-MAIL 02 (VM02). When listening to multiple new messages when Auto Erase or Save is set to Erase: ❥ Any message to which you partially listen is automatically erased. ❥ Any message to which you hang up during or do not listen is retained as a new message. For example, if you have three new messages, listen to part of message 1, dial L to hear part of message 2 and then hang up, IntraMail automatically: ❥ Erases message 1. ❥ Retains messages 2 and 3 as new messages. ❥ Restarts the flashing ring/message lamp. ❥ Resets the telephone display to V-MAIL 02 (VM02). Telephone Display while Listening to a Message While listening to a message, your telephone display shows you important information about the message. This includes: ■ The caller’s telephone number (if available). ■ The selected Message List. ■ The message number in the selected list. ■ The date and time the message was left. X (9) Exit your mailbox. Dial 0 while listening to hear the list of options. Message Listen Options [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Option Description DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 115 IntraMail Features Super Display 22-Button and 34-Button Display Log Onto Voice Mail A subscriber can log onto their mailbox using a method that best suits their needs and location. While at their own phone, the subscriber just presses a single key to log onto their mailbox. To use their mailbox while at a co-worker’s phone, the subscriber dials the IntraMail master number, followed by their mailbox number (which is normally the same as their extension number). If they are away from the office, the subscriber can still use their mailbox by calling in through the Automated Attendant. Local (On-site) Logon An extension user can log onto their mailbox in the following ways: ❥ Press their V-MAIL key to log onto their Subscriber Mailbox. ❥ Dial the IntraMail master number (e.g., 700), followed by their mailbox number. This method is typically used by Guest Mailbox users, as well as subscribers attempting to log into their Subscriber Mailbox from a co-worker’s phone. Remote Log On A Subscriber Mailbox user can call into the Automated Attendant and log onto their mailbox. Following are two of the ways a user can do this: ❥ After the Automated Attendant answers, dial a digit (typically #) followed by their mailbox number. This method allows outside callers to log into their mailboxes from outside the company. Once they log into their mailbox, they can use the allowed features in the mailbox main menu. To avoid unauthorized An extension user can press a key to log onto (access) their IntraMail mailbox. Time message was left Currently selected Message List Message number (in selected Message List) Caller’s phone number (requires Caller ID) Date message was left Date message was left Time message was left Caller’s phone number (requires Caller ID) Currently selected Message List Message number (in selected Message List) 116 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description access to their mailbox, the user should enable their own unique Security Code. ❥ If an extension has a Direct Inward Line that voice mail picks up, the caller can dial # during their greeting to log into their mailbox (instead of leaving a message). This method allows subscribers to dial their own number and then use the features of their mailbox. This capability must be set up in the user’s Next Call Routing Mailbox. Mailbox Name A caller leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox can hear the mailbox’s prerecorded name instead of the mailbox number. The prerecorded Mailbox Name gives the subscriber’s mailbox that personal touch. Prior to leaving a message, caller’s will hear the name instead of the default “extension xxx” prompt. The recorded name can be up to 10 seconds long. Mailbox Options Menu The Mailbox Options Menu is a sub-menu of a subscriber’s Main Menu that provides access to the Auto Time Stamp, Mailbox Security Code Delete, and Message Notification features. The chart below summarizes these options. Auto Time Stamp helps if the subscriber needs to know the time and date of each message they receive without taking any extra steps. If mailbox security is not an issue, the subscriber can delete their security code to simplify logging onto their mailbox. Mailbox Security Code Delete The System Administrator can delete the security code for any Subscriber Mailbox. This effectively unlocks the mailbox. If mailbox security is not necessary, deleting a mailbox’s security code speeds up mailbox logon. Without a security code, the subscriber just presses their V-MAIL key to immediately log onto their mailbox. Main Menu After a Subscriber Mailbox user logs into their mailbox, IntraMail provides them with the Main Menu of options. The Main Menu provides quick access to the most commonly used mailbox features in a central location. It includes listening and recording options, as well as additional selections for recording mailbox A mailbox caller can hear the extension user’s prerecorded name instead of their mailbox number. A Subscriber Mailbox sub-menu that provides access to the Auto Time Stamp, Mailbox Security Code Delete, and Message Notification features. Mailbox Options Menu [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Option Description S (7) [Security Code] - [Sec] • Erase the mailbox’s Security Code. N (6) [Notification] - [Notif] • Set up Message Notification. AT (28) [Time Stamp] - [Time] • Enable or disable Auto Time Stamp. To hear the list of Mailbox Options, dial 0. Allows the System Administrator to delete the security code for any mailbox. Provides options to an extension user when they log onto their mailbox. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 117 IntraMail Features names and greetings. The chart below summarizes these options. Make Call Make Call lets a Subscriber Mailbox user listen to a voice message and dial MC to return the call without knowing their caller’s phone number. Make Call automates returning messages since you don’t have to dial the message sender’s telephone number. Make Call is always available for messages received from co-workers. Make call is available for messages received from outside callers if the system has Caller ID enabled (and provided by the connected telco). While listening to a message at a Super Display Telephone, first 2 lines of the display show the callers number (or extension) in addition to the date and time the message was left. At a 22-Button or 34-Button Telephone, the first line of the display shows the date and time the message was left. Message Count Display The telephone display provides interactive status updates for the subscriber’s mailbox. The subscriber doesn’t have to call their mailbox and wait for the voice prompts to find out the number of new and saved messages in their mailbox. Then can just look at the display instead. While idle, the telephone display shows the number of new messages waiting in a subscriber’s mailbox. The message count automatically updates as the subscriber receives new messages and processes older messages. While logged into the mailbox, the tele- Mailbox Main Menu [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Option Description L (5) [Listen] - [Lstn] • Listen to messages. RS (77) [Record] - [Rec] • Record and send a message. G (4) [Greeting] - [Greet] • Record a mailbox greeting. RN (76) [Name] - [N/A] • Record a mailbox name. [Message List] - [N/A] • Select the active Message List. 1N (16) [Message List + New Messages] - [N/A] • Select the New Message List. 1S (17) Message List + Saved Messages] - [N/A] • Select the Saved Message List. 1A (12) [Message List + All Messages] - [N/A] • Select the All Message List. OP (67) [MBOX Options] - [N/A] • Use the Mailbox Options SA (72) [System Admin] - [N/A] • Access the System Administrator options. TI (84) • Check the current time and date. X (9) [Exit] - [Exit] • Exit your mailbox. To hear the complete Main Menu of options, dial 0 while in the Main Menu. A Subscriber Mailbox user can dial MC to return a call without knowing their caller’s number. The telephone display can show the number of new messages waiting in a user’s mailbox. 118 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description phone display shows the number of both new and saved messages. 22-Button and 34-Button Display Super Display One new message waiting in the Subscriber Mailbox While Idle While Logged-in One saved message waiting in the Subscriber Mailbox One new message waiting in the Subscriber Mailbox One new message waiting in the Subscriber Mailbox While Idle While Logged-in One saved message waiting in the Subscriber Mailbox One new message waiting in the Subscriber Mailbox DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 119 IntraMail Features Message Delete A Subscriber Mailbox user can delete any messages left in their mailbox. Message Delete lets the subscriber do their own mailbox maintenance. They can delete messages they no longer need and save messages that contain essential information. With Message Delete, the subscriber doesn’t have to rely on the System Administrator to perform these routine mailbox maintenance functions. Message Forward A Subscriber Mailbox user can forward a message in their mailbox to a co-worker. Forwarding is helpful when a subscriber receives a message with which a co-worker can assist them. Rather than sending a new message, the subscriber can just forward the message with which they need help. They can also optionally record a comment before the forwarded message. Typically, the comment would describe the reason for the message forwarding. IntraMail saves the message in the subscriber’s mailbox after they forward it. The Message Forward destination receives the forwarded message as a new message. Message Length You can set the maximum length of a message that can be left in a Subscriber Mailbox. When a caller tries to leave a message that exceeds the limit, they hear, “You have reached the recording limit.” IntraMail sends the portion of the message that fits within the allowed Message Length and hangs up. The Message Length option helps you maximize the storage space reserved for messages. If you find that callers are leaving unusually long messages, shorten the Message Length. IntraMail will cut off the message once the caller reaches the Message Length limit. On the other hand, if you hear that IntraMail is cutting off caller’s messages prematurely, increase the Message Length to give callers more time. Message Listen Mode After logging onto their mailbox, the subscriber can select the category of messages to which they want to listen. Then can listen to just new messages, just saved messages, or all messages. Message Listen Mode lets the subscriber customize their mailbox to initially play just the list of messages to which they want to listen. For example, if a subscriber has many saved messages and just a few new messages, then can log onto their mailbox and dial 1N to select the new message list. When they press L, they will then cycle through just their new message. Initially, a Subscriber Mailbox uses the All Message List. If they select a different message list, IntraMail reinstates the all Message List the next time they log onto their mailbox. An extension user can delete any messages left in their mailbox. A subscriber can forward a message in their mailbox to a co-worker. Through system programming, set the maximum length of a message that can be left in a user’s voice mailbox. When a user calls their mailbox, they can dial a code to listen to all their messages, their new messages, or their saved messages. 120 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Message Notification Once activated by the Subscriber Mailbox user, Message Notification dials a telephone number to let the user know when there are new messages in their mailbox. When Message Notification is on, a subscriber who is out of the office does not have keep calling their mailbox remotely to find out if they have new messages. IntraMail will let them know automatically. Notification can call extensions, local numbers, long distance numbers and digital pagers. When a Subscriber Mailbox user sets up Message Notification, they choose from the following options: ❥ If Message Notification is enabled or disabled. (Message Notification can only occur if it is enabled.) ❥ The time of day Message Notification should begin and end. (Callouts will only occur between the begin and end times.) ❥ The type of device to which Message Notification will be calling. (Message Notification can call a normal telephone number or a digital pager.) ❥ The telephone or pager service phone number. To protect your mailbox from unauthorized access, be sure to record a security code for your mailbox before enabling Message Notification. How Message Notification Works to Normal Telephone Numbers 1. The subscriber activates Message Notification for their mailbox (see Operation below). 2. When the subscriber receives a new message, IntraMail dials the destination that should receive the Message Notification. - IntraMail waits up to 30 seconds for ringback, reorder, busy or voice activity from the called number. If nothing is detected, the callout is considered unanswered. 3. If the recipient answers, IntraMail plays the notification message (“Hello, I have a message for”) and asks the recipient to dial 1 to log onto their mailbox. The recipient hears the notification message if: - They say “Hello” after answering the callout, or - The system receives answer supervision from the telco after the recipient answers the call. (Note that the recipient can skip the announcement by dialing 1 to log onto their mailbox after answering the callout – without saying “Hello”.), or - The notification is to a system extension. 4. Once the recipient logs onto the mailbox, the notification is considered acknowledged and will not reoccur until the subscriber receives new messages. 5. If the recipient doesn’t answer, the system will retry the callout number. After completing the programmed number of callout attempts, Message Notification will stop. 6. Once the notification process begins, a new message does not restart the process if it is already in progress. Once the process ends (e.g., if the message is acknowledged or the maximum number of callout attempts is reached), the next new message will restart the process. How Message Notification Works to Digital Pager Numbers 1. The subscriber activates Message Notification for their mailbox (see Operation below). 2. When the subscriber receives a new message, IntraMail immediately dials the pager service. - IntraMail waits up to 30 seconds for ringback, reorder, busy or voice activity from the called number. If nothing is detected, the callout is considered unanswered. 3. After the pager service answers, IntraMail sends a dial string which causes the pager display to show the subscriber’s mailbox number as well as the number of new messages in the mailbox. - The notification is considered acknowledged if the recipient logs onto the mailbox. Notification will not reoccur until the subscriber receives new messages. Dials a telephone number to let the recipient know there are new messages in their mailbox. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 121 IntraMail Features - If the pager service doesn’t answer, IntraMail will retry the callout number. Message Notification may eventually cancel if the callout remains unacknowledged. Message On Hold Message On Hold allows the System Administrator to record a message that will play to callers while they wait on Hold. For example, you can record a message summarizing available services or hours of operation. This message will play to callers as soon as you put them on Hold, and continually repeat as long as they remain on Hold. Message On Hold recording is only available from the System Administrator’s Mailbox. IntraMail provides a single Message On Hold. Any number of callers can simultaneously listen to the Message On Hold recording. Message Playback Direction When you dial L (5) after logging into your mailbox, IntraMail will play messages in either LIFO (last-infirst- out) or FIFO (first-in-first-out) order. If you prefer to hear new messages first, enable LIFO (last-in-firstout) listening order. The newest (last-in) messages are at the top of the message list and the oldest messages are at the bottom of the list. If you wants to be reminded of oldest messages first, enable FIFO (first-in-firstout) listening order. The oldest (first-in) messages are at the top of the message list and the newest messages are at the bottom. Check with your system administrator to have this set up. Message Reply A Subscriber Mailbox user can reply to a message from a co-worker by dialing RE, without knowing the caller’s extension or mailbox number. Message Reply saves the subscriber valuable time since they don’t need to know the sender’s extension number or send a separate message to respond. The subscriber can just listen to the co-worker’s message, dial a code, and record their answer. The message sender receives the reply as a new message. Message Retention IntraMail will save a Subscriber Mailbox’s new or saved messages for the Message Retention interval and then delete them. You’ll find Message Retention to be an invaluable tool for managing IntraMail’s voice message storage space. If subscribers are letting old, unwanted messages build up in their mailboxes, shorten the Message Retention time. Be sure to let the subscribers know how long IntraMail will retain their messages. By default, IntraMail retains all messages indefinitely. IntraMail performs its Message Retention deletions at midnight of the day the message was marked for deletion. For example, if the mailbox has 1 day Message Retention, any messages left on Wednesday are deleted at midnight on Thursday. Message Retention Guard Time IntraMail has a Message Retention Guard Time that automatically starts when you change the date and time in the telephone system. Message deletion can occur only after the Message Retention Guard Time expires. This prevents Message Retention from inadvertently deleting messages when you change the telephone system time and date. The guard time is fixed at 4 days. A prerecorded message can play to callers while they wait on Hold An extension user can listen to their messages in either LIFO (last-in-first-out) or FIFO (first-infirst- out) order. An extension user can reply to a message in their mailbox by dialing a simple code, without knowing the caller’s extension number. Automatically deletes a mailbox’s messages after a preset time. 122 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Message Storage Limit Message Storage Limit sets how many messages can be left in a Subscriber Mailbox. Message Storage Limit is another invaluable tool for managing IntraMail’s voice message storage space. To conserve storage space and make it available for new messages, decrease the Message Storage Limit. If storage space is not an issue, increase the Message Storage Limit so subscribers can store additional messages. Be sure to let the subscribers know how many messages their mailboxes can hold. Message Waiting Lamp An extension’s Ring/Message Lamp flashes on the telephone to indicate that the user has new messages waiting in their mailbox. Once IntraMail is properly installed and programmed, telephone Ring/Message Lamp operation is automatic. The Ring/Message Lamp will flash fast (red) when there are new messages in the extension user’s mailbox, providing a visual reminder of new messages. The subscriber does not have to call their mailbox and listen to the voice prompts to find out when they have new messages. Multiple Company Greetings The Automated Attendant can answer each individual line with a unique greeting and unique set of dialing options. Since there are a total of 8 Answer Tables, this allows up to 8 companies or departments to share a single IntraMail. Callers to each company hear that company’s greeting (Instruction Menu) and can dial options that may be only available to that specific company. You set this up as follows: ❥ Assign a unique Answer Table (1-8) to each line that you want to have an individual greeting. ❥ For each Answer Table, assign the Call Routing Mailbox that will handle the call. ❥ For each of the assigned Call Routing Mailboxes, set up the dialing options (Dial Action Table) and record an Instruction Menu. If multiple companies or departments share an IntraMail, messaging and calling between the workers of each company or department are not restricted. Sets how many messages a mailbox can store. The Ring/Message Lamp flashes when the user has new messages waiting in their mailbox. By assigning a unique Answer Table to each line, a single IntraMail system can provide individual greetings and dialing options for several companies. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 123 IntraMail Features Next Call Routing Mailbox The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. It also provides additional dialing options to callers routed to an Announcement Mailbox. Next Call Routing Mailbox lets the caller choose how IntraMail should handle their call. For example, if an Automated Attendant caller dials a subscriber’s extension and hears the greeting, Next Call Routing Mailbox (if programmed) allows them to dial other options instead of hanging up. Subscriber Mailbox Options The following chart shows the additional dialing options a caller may have while listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Dialing Option options. For an explanation of the options a caller can dial while recording, see Record and Send a Message (page 128). Provides callers with additional dialing options after they leave a message in an extension’s mailbox (depending on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Mode). Dialing Options While Listening to a Subscriber Mailbox Greeting Next Call Routing Mailbox Dialing Option Digit Dialed Action Outside Call Intercom Call Undefined No 0 Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and the 1-9 greeting repeats. # IntraMail hangs up. * Caller skips greeting and can immediately start recording. 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) No 0 Caller follows 0 action in Next Call Routing Mailbox. Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and the greeting repeats. 1-9 Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and the greeting repeats. # Caller routes to the Next Call Routing Mailbox and hears its Instruction Menu. IntraMail hangs up. * Caller skips greeting and can immediately start recording. 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) Yes 0 Caller follows key’s action in Next Call Routing Mailbox. Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and the greeting repeats. 1-9 # Caller routes to the Next Call Routing Mailbox and hears its Instruction Menu. IntraMail hangs up. * Caller skips greeting and can immediately start recording. 124 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Logging Onto a Subscriber Mailbox while Listening to the Greeting A subscriber who wishes to log onto their mailbox while listening to their greeting must have the option set in their Next Call Routing Mailbox. To allow this capability, for example: ❥ Program the Next Call Routing Mailbox # digit as LOGON to IXXX. ❥ While listening to their greeting, the subscriber can dial: # (to route to their Next Call Routing Mailbox), then # and their mailbox number to log onto their mailbox. By default, this option is provided in Call Routing Mailbox 1. Additionally, the subscriber should enable a Security Code for their mailbox to prevent unauthorized logons. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 125 IntraMail Features Announcement Mailbox Options The following charts show how an Announcement Mailbox handles Automated Attendant calls. ■ The first chart explains what happens when the outside call is directly answered by the Announcement Mailbox. This happens when the Answer Table uses an Announcement Mailbox for routing instead of a Call Routing Mailbox. ■ The second chart explains what happens when the outside call is answered by a Call Routing Mailbox and then routed to the Announcement Mailbox. This can happen, for example, when a caller dials a digit to hear an announcement of company directions. ■ See Answer Tables (page 96) for more on setting up Answer Tables. Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing (If the outside caller routes directly to the Announcement Mailbox) Next Call Routing Mailbox Repeat Count Hang Up After Action Undefined 0 (No repeats) Yes or No • If the caller doesn’t dial, after the announcement IntraMail hangs up. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, IntraMail says “That is an invalid entry” and hangs up. 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) 0 (No repeats) No • If the caller doesn’t dial, after the announcement they route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox. Yes • If the caller doesn’t dial, after the announcement IntraMail hangs up. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox. Undefined x (x number of repeats) Yes or No • If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the announcement repeat x number of times and then IntraMail hangs up. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, IntraMail says “That is an invalid entry” and aborts the announcement. The announcement repeats (if allowed by the Repeat Count) and then IntraMail hangs up. 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) x (x number of repeats) No • If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the announcement repeat x number of times and then route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox. Yes • If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the announcement repeat x number of times and then IntraMail hangs up. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox. 126 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing (Page 1 of 2) (If the outside caller routes to the Announcement Mailbox from a Call Routing Mailbox) Next Call Routing Mailbox Repeat Count Hang Up After Action Undefined 0 (No repeats) No • If the caller doesn’t dial, after the announcement the caller goes back to the initial Call Routing Mailbox. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, IntraMail says “That is an invalid entry” and routes the caller goes back to the initial Call Routing Mailbox. Yes • If the caller doesn’t dial, after the announcement IntraMail hangs up. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, IntraMail says “That is an invalid entry” and hangs up. 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) 0 (No repeats) No • If the caller doesn’t dial, after the announcement they route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox. Yes • If the caller doesn’t dial, after the announcement IntraMail hangs up. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox. Undefined x (x number of repeats) No • If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the announcement repeat x number of times and then go back to the initial Call Routing Mailbox. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, IntraMail says “That is an invalid entry” and aborts the announcement. The announcement repeats (if allowed by the Repeat Count) and then IntraMail routes back to the initial Call Routing Mailbox. Yes • If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the announcement x number of times and then IntraMail hangs up. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, IntraMail says “That is an invalid entry” and aborts the announcement. The announcement repeats (if allowed by the Repeat Count) and then IntraMail hangs up. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 127 IntraMail Features Programming Voice Mail You program (customize) IntraMail by using the DSX telephone programming or the WindowsTM-based DSX System Administrator PC Program running on a PC or laptop. You can also do limited programming from the System Administrator’s mailbox. By using the many programmable options available with Intra- Mail, you should be able to set up the system to accurately meet the customer’s requirements. ❥ To customize IntraMail using the telephone programming, use this manual. ❥ To customize IntraMail using the PC program, see the DSX PC Program User Guide. Quick Message Quick Message is a Dial Action Table action that allows Automated Attendant callers to dial a digit (normally *) followed by a mailbox number to leave a message in a Subscriber Mailbox. Since Quick Message is enabled by default, it is an efficient way for experienced Automated Attendant callers to leave messages. There is no need to dial an extension first. To make this option more readily available to all Automated Attendant callers, consider having the active Instruction Menu describe how to use the Quick Message option. There are two Quick Message Dial Action Table actions: ❥ Quick Message with Greeting (REC1) The caller hears the mailbox greeting followed by a beep and can leave message. If the greeting is not recorded, the caller hears, “At the tone, you can leave your message for extension xxx (or name if recorded). Start recording at the tone. When you are done, press the # key or hang up.” ❥ Quick Message without Greeting (REC2) The caller bypasses the mailbox greeting (hearing “Recording” and a beep instead) and can leave a message. This is typically used with a Next Call Routing Mailbox when the caller is asked to dial a digit (e.g., 1) to leave a message. Otherwise, the mailbox greeting (if recorded) would be heard again. 1-16 (valid Call Routing Mailbox) x (x number of repeats) No • If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the announcement repeat x number of times and then route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox. Yes • If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the announcement repeat x number of times and then IntraMail hangs up. • If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox. Customize IntraMail using the embedded telephone programming or the separately available System Administrator PC program. Automated Attendant callers can dial a digit followed by an extension number to leave a message directly in a user’s mailbox. Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing (Page 2 of 2) (If the outside caller routes to the Announcement Mailbox from a Call Routing Mailbox) Next Call Routing Mailbox Repeat Count Hang Up After Action 128 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Record and Send a Message A Subscriber Mailbox user can record and send a message to any other Subscriber Mailbox. Record and Send a Message is the heart of IntraMail’s voice messaging system. It allows co-workers to efficiently stay in touch and exchange essential information without relying on message slips, memos, or email. Recording Options While recording a message, a Subscriber Mailbox user has several recording options from which to choose. The following table shows these options. A Subscriber Mailbox user can record and send a message to any other Subscriber Mailbox. Message Recording Options Option Description Options available while recording: * Pause/resume recording. E (3) Erase the recording. # End recording. Dial 0 while recording to hear the list of options. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 129 IntraMail Features Remote Programming You can remotely program IntraMail by using the WindowsTM-based DSX System Administrator PC Program running on a PC or laptop. After the initial installation, Remote Programming allows you to customize IntraMail to meet the customer’s requirements without being on-site. See the DSX PC Program User Guide for more. Routing Mailbox Routing Mailboxes are a category of mailboxes normally used to route Automated Attendant calls. A Routing Mailbox can be an Announcement Mailbox, a Call Routing Mailbox, or a Directory Dialing Mailbox. See the following for more on each of Routing Mailbox types: ❥ Announcement Mailbox (page 96) ❥ Call Routing Mailbox (page 102) ❥ Directory Dialing Mailbox (page 105) Screened Transfer Screened Transfer is an Automated Attendant option that allows callers to directly dial system extensions. Screened Transfer (and its related feature Unscreened Transfer) allows the IntraMail Automated Attendant to transfer outside calls to system extensions without the need for a live receptionist or operator. It is similar to telephone system screened transfers in which the transferring party controls the transfer. After an Automated IntraMail programming is available remotely via the System Administrator PC program. A category of mailboxes used to route Automated Attendant calls Similar to telephone system screened transfers in which the transferring party controls the transfer. 130 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Attendant caller dials an extension, IntraMail calls (screens) the destination extension to see if the transfer can go through. ❥ If the destination is busy or in DND, the Automated Attendant doesn’t extend the call and immediately provides the caller with additional options. ❥ If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the destination answers, the call goes through. If the destination doesn’t answer within a preset interval, the Automated Attendant doesn’t extend the call and provides the caller with additional options. Screened vs. Unscreened Transfer Both Screened and Unscreened Transfer allow Automated Attendant callers to directly dial system extensions. The following summarizes the differences between these two types of Automated Attendant transfer. ❥ With Unscreened Transfer, calls from the Automated Attendant ring like other transferred calls and display the incoming Caller ID data (if provided by telco and enabled in programming). Screened Transfers ring like Intercom calls and do not display Caller ID until the call is answered. ❥ Both Screened and Unscreened Transfers route unanswered calls to the subscriber’s greeting (recorded or default) so the caller can leave a message. However, only Screened Transfer allows the caller to dial 2 to reach the Next Call Routing Mailbox options (if programmed). Screened Transfer and Inactive Mailboxes Screened Transfer to an extension can only occur if the destination extension has an active mailbox. If the extension’s mailbox is inactive, the Automated Attendant caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and then returns to the Automated Attendant. The table on the next page shows in detail how Screened Transfer operates. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 131 IntraMail Features Security Code A mailbox can have a security code to protect it from unauthorized access. A Security Code must be 4 digits long, using 0-9. If a subscriber wants to keep their mailbox private, they can enter a Security Code. No one else can use the subscriber’s mailbox unless they know the code. Screened Transfer (STRF) Operation • Call = Call answered by the Automated Attendant. • Extension = Extension dialed by Automated Attendant caller. If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is off (see page 97 for more on this feature): Extension Idle Extension Busy Extension in DND With Active Greeting Recorded 1. Places a screened (Intercom) call to extension. -If answered, transfers call. 2. If unanswered1: -With no Next Call Routing Mailbox, caller hears greeting and can leave a message. -With a Next Call Routing Mailbox, caller can dial 1 to leave a message or 22 for other options. 1. When busy: -With no Next Call Routing Mailbox, caller hears greeting and can leave a message. -With a Next Call Routing Mailbox, caller can dial 1 to leave a message or 22 for other options. 1. When in DND: -With no Next Call Routing Mailbox, caller hears greeting and can leave a message. -With a Next Call Routing Mailbox, caller can dial 1 to leave a message or 22 for other options. With Active Greeting Not Recorded 1. Places a screened (Intercom) call to extension. -If answered, transfers call. 2. If unanswered1: -With no Next Call Routing Mailbox, IntraMail prompts caller to leave a message. -With a Next Call Routing Mailbox, caller can dial 1 to leave a message or 22 for other options. 1. When busy: -With no Next Call Routing Mailbox, IntraMail prompts caller to leave a message. -With a Next Call Routing Mailbox, caller can dial 1 to leave a message or 22 for other options. 1. When in DND: -With no Next Call Routing Mailbox, caller hears greeting and can leave a message. -With a Next Call Routing Mailbox, caller can dial 1 to leave a message or 22 for other options. If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is on (see page 97 for more on this feature): Extension Idle Extension Busy Extension in DND With Active Greeting Recorded or Not Recorded 1. Sends call immediately to mailbox: -Plays greeting (if recorded), or -Prompts caller to start recording. 1 After the Screened Transfer Timeout interval. 2 Dialing 2 routes the call to the Next Call Routing Mailbox for additional dialing options. See Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 123) for more. A mailbox can have a security code to guard against unauthorized access. 132 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Single Digit Dialing An Automated Attendant caller can press a single key to route to an extension, route to another destination, or use an IntraMail feature. Single Digit Dialing simplifies the Automated Attendant since the caller just dials a single digit to reach an extension or use an option. If you set up Single Digit Dialing, be sure to customize the active Instruction Menu so it describes which digits the caller should dial to use the available options. Subscriber Mailbox A Subscriber Mailbox is the type of mailbox assigned to a telephone system extension. The telephone assigned to the Subscriber Mailbox is called the subscriber’s extension. When an extension user accesses their voice mail, they are using their Subscriber Mailbox. It provides the IntraMail voice messaging services. For a brief overview of the features available at a Subscriber Mailbox, review the Other Related Features below. Then, go to the individual feature to find out how it operates and any programming required to make it work. IntraMail automatically assigns a mailbox to each extension in the number plan. In DSX-80/160, the first 16 (300-315) Subscriber Mailboxes are active. In DSX-40, the first eight (300-307) Subscriber Mailboxes are active. System Administrator The System Administrator is a Subscriber Mailbox that has unique system administration features such as recording Instruction Menus and deleting messages in a co-worker’s mailbox. The System Administrator features are an essential part of IntraMail setup since they allow the recording of the system-wide messages and provide Subscriber Mailbox maintenance. After logging onto their Subscriber Mailbox, the System Administrator can use all of the features in the SA menu. The System Administrator Options table below shows these options. Allows an Automated Attendant caller to press a single key for an extension, another destination, or use an IntraMail feature. The mailbox type normally used for telephone system extensions. The extension user that has IntraMail system administration capabilities. System Administrator Options [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Option Description For more, see: SA (72) [System Admin] - [N/A] Access the System Administrator options. I (4) [Instruction] - [Instr] Record an Instruction Menu. .Instruction Menu (page 112) A (2) [Announcement] - [Annc] Record an Announcement Message. Announcement Message (page 96) S (7) [Subscriber] - [Subs] Access the Subscriber Maintenance options (see the following features). EA (32) [Erase All Messages] - [Msgs] Erase all messages in a mailbox. .Erasing All Messages (page 105) EG (34) [Erase Greeting] - [Greet] Erase a mailbox greeting. • With Multiple Greetings, this option simultaneously erases all recorded greetings in a Subscriber Mailbox. Additionally, the active greeting is reset to 1. .Greeting (page 109) DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 133 IntraMail Features System Administrator Mailbox A System Administrator Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox in which you have enabled the System Administrator option. This provides the subscriber with system administration capabilities. IntraMail can have multiple System Administrator Mailboxes. Turn to System Administrator for more. System Re-initialization Initializing the telephone system automatically initializes all IntraMail programming. You may want to do this if the site requirements significantly change and it is easier to start over from default than remove all your custom programming. Reinitializing returns all programmed options to their default values. To initialize (erase) Subscriber Mailbox Security Codes and all recordings, use a System Administrator Mailbox. Time and Date with Voice Mail Since IntraMail is completely integrated with the telephone system software, the IntraMail time and date is the same as the phone system time and date. Since time and date is used on telephone displays and with the Auto Time Stamp and Time and Date Stamp features, be sure to set it accurately. To change the time and date, use either the system programmable options or the User Programmable features. See Programming below. The Time and Date is retained if the telephone system power should fail or the system resets. In addition, a Subscriber Mailbox user can hear the time and date when they call their mailbox. EN (36) [Erase Name] - [Name] Erase a mailbox name. .Mailbox Name (page 116) S (7) [Erase Security Code] - [N/A] Delete a mailbox Security Code. .Mailbox Security Code Delete (page 116) N (6) [Record Mailbox Name] - [N/A] Record Mailbox Name. .Mailbox Name (page 116) O (6) [Answer Schedule] - [N/A] Override the active Answer Schedule. Answer Schedule Override (page 96) 1 [N/A] - [N/A] Message on Hold Message On Hold (page 121) V (8) [N/A] - [N/A] Hear the version number of the IntraMail stored voice prompts. A Subscriber Mailbox option that enables the system administration capabilities. Reinitializing IntraMail returns all programmed options to their default values. Reinitializing the telephone system returns all programmed options to their factory set (default) values. Any site specific programming you have done will be erased following reinitialization. Set the system time and date. System Administrator Options [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Option Description For more, see: 134 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Time and Date Stamp While listening to a message, a Subscriber Mailbox user can dial TI to hear the Time and Date the message was left. This is a handy option while reviewing messages. The subscriber can just dial a code to find out when the message arrived. Time and Date Stamp with Caller ID With caller ID installed, a mailbox user can dial TI while listening to a message from an outside caller to hear the time the message was sent, as well as the caller’s number. This capability is always available for messages left by an Intercom caller. Transfer to a Mailbox An extension user can transfer their active call to a co-worker’s mailbox. This lets the caller leave a personal message for the co-worker. Transfer to a Mailbox is one of the big conveniences of IntraMail since the caller can state their business and not have to call back later. It saves the caller time and cuts down on unnecessary telephone system call processing. Transfer to a Mailbox is frequently used by attendants and receptionists as well as other co-workers. Transfer Message Handling When the transferring extension leaves a message before hanging up (which could occur if the destination’s calls are forwarded to voice mail), the system will record two separate messages. One message will be from the transferring extension; the other from the transferred caller. Each message has the correct Caller ID assigned. Additionally, if a caller is transferred to an extension and Voice Mail picks up, the caller will hear the entire greeting for the called extension’s mailbox. The greeting will restart as soon as the system connects the caller to the Transfer destination’s mailbox. Transfer to a UCD Group The Automated Attendant can transfer outside callers to a UCD Group master number. If a customer has a UCD Group set up for a department (such as Sales or Tech Service), the Automated Attendant can send calls directly to that department without any operator intervention. It is not necessary to have a company employee handle the calls. The calls will ring a member of the group or queue (wait in line) if all coworker’s in the group are busy. To set up Transfer to a UCD Group, assign a STRF or UTRF action in the active Dial Action Table to route to the UCD Group master number. Refer to Screened Transfer (page 129) and Unscreened Transfer (page 135) for more on how these Automated Attendant options handle calls. Undefined Routing An Automated Attendant Undefined Routing is a Dial Action Table key assignment for which there is no routing defined. When an Automated Attendant caller dials a digit and there is no routing assigned, IntraMail plays, “That is an invalid entry.” IntraMail then repeats the dialing options (Instruction Menu) to the caller. If a Dial Action Table key assignment has no function, you should normally leave it undefined. A mailbox user can listen to a message and dial a code to hear the time the message was sent, as well as the caller’s number. An extension user can transfer their active call to a co-worker’s mailbox. The Automated Attendant can transfer outside callers to UCD Group master numbers. A key pad digit for which the Automated Attendant has no routing defined. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 135 IntraMail Features Unscreened Transfer Unscreened Transfer is an Automated Attendant option that allows callers to directly dial system extensions. Unscreened Transfer (and its related feature Screened Transfer) allows the IntraMail Automated Attendant to transfer outside calls to system extensions without the need for a live receptionist or operator. It is similar to telephone system unscreened transfers in which the transferring party immediately extends the call. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, IntraMail transfers the call to the destination and hangs up. Any recalls or additional routing are handled by the telephone system – just as with any other unscreened transfer. Screened vs. Unscreened Transfer Both Screened and Unscreened Transfer allow Automated Attendant callers to directly dial system extensions. The following summarizes the differences between these two types of Automated Attendant transfer. ❥ With Unscreened Transfer, calls from the Automated Attendant ring like other transferred calls and display the incoming Caller ID data (if provided by telco and enabled in programming). Screened Transfers ring like Intercom calls and do not display Caller ID until the call is answered. ❥ Both Screened and Unscreened Transfers route unanswered calls to the subscriber’s greeting (recorded or default) so the caller can leave a message. However, only Screened Transfer allows the caller to dial 2 to reach the Next Call Routing Mailbox options (if programmed). Unscreened Transfer and Inactive Mailboxes An Unscreened Transfer will go through to the destination extension even if the destination doesn’t have an active mailbox. If the Unscreened Transfer is unanswered at the destination, the call returns to the Automated Attendant. The following table shows in detail how Unscreened Transfer operates. Similar to telephone system unscreened transfers in which the transferring party immediately extends the call. Unscreened Transfer (UTRF) Operation • Call = Call answered by the Automated Attendant. • Extension = Extension dialed by Automated Attendant caller. If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is off (see page 97 for more on this feature): Extension Idle Extension Busy Extension in DND With Active Greeting Recorded 1. Transfers call to extension. -If answered, connects call (just like a phone system transfer). -If unanswered1 in a default phone system, plays greeting (so caller can start recording).2 1. Transfers call to extension. 2. If unanswered1 in a default phone system, plays greeting (so caller can start recording)2 1. Transfers call to extension. 2. If unanswered1 in a default phone system, plays greeting (so caller can start recording).2 With Active Greeting Not Recorded 1. Transfers call to extension. -If answered, connects call (just like a phone system transfer). -If unanswered1 in a default phone system, plays name (if recorded) or extension number. IntraMail then prompts caller to leave a message.2 1. Transfers call to extension. 2. If unanswered1 in a default phone system, plays name (if recorded) or extension number. IntraMail then prompts caller to leave a message.2 1. Transfers call to extension. 2. If unanswered1 in a default phone system, plays name (if recorded) or extension number. IntraMail then prompts caller to leave a message.2 136 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description Voice Mail Overflow The telephone system can automatically reroute unanswered outside calls to the IntraMail Automated Attendant. Voice Mail Overflow ensures that IntraMail will pick up calls that don’t go through. This allows callers to leave a message rather than having to call back later. Voice Mail can be the overflow destination for the following types of unanswered calls: ❥ Key Ring Overflow A line ringing an extension’s line keys can overflow to the IntraMail Automated Attendant. ❥ UCD Group Overflow A line that rings UCD Hunting group can overflow to the group’s mailbox. See Group Mailbox (page 110) for more. ❥ Ring Group Overflow A line transferred by an extension or the Automated Attendant (UTRF or STRF) to a Ring Group can overflow to the group’s mailbox. See Group Mailbox (page 110) for more. ❥ Direct Inward Line (DIL) Overflow A line that directly rings an extension or can overflow to that extension’s mailbox if not answered. ❥ Ring Group Direct Inward Line (DIL) Overflow A Direct Inward Line (DIL) to the Ring Group master number can overflow to the group’s mailbox. See Group Mailbox (page 110) for more. If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is on (see page 97 for more on this feature): Extension Idle Extension Busy Extension in DND With Active Greeting Recorded or Not Recorded 1. Sends call immediately to mailbox: -Plays greeting (if recorded), or -Prompts caller to start recording. 1 After the 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer interval. 2 Custom phone system programming may redirect the unanswered call (for example, to a hunt group or another extension). Insures that IntraMail will pick up calls that don’t go through. DSX Product Description IntraMail Features ◆ 137 IntraMail Features Voice Prompting Messages IntraMail provides the telephone system with Voice Prompting Messages which tell the extension user the status or progress of their call. For example, if an extension user calls a co-worker while their extension is in DND, they hear, “Please do not disturb.” Voice Prompting Messages guide the user while using certain features. The following table lists the available Voice Prompting Messages. Volume Control with Voice Mail Since IntraMail is completely integrated with the telephone system software, Volume Control is available at a subscriber’s keyset any time while listening to a message, greeting, or prerecorded voice prompt. Volume Controls let the user interactively adjust the loudness of the IntraMail messages and prompts to a comfortable level. IntraMail provides Voice Prompts that tell the extension user the status or progress of their call. Voice Prompting Messages Voice Prompt Description The number you have dialed is not in service. The extension you called is part of the extension data base but is not installed. Vacant number. The extension you called is not part of the extension data base. This is extension ___. You press N (6) to hear your extension number. The time is ____. The date is ____. You press T (8) on your idle keyset to hear the Time and Date. All lines are busy. For callback, press 2 or the callback key. You dial a Line Group access code (9 or 90- 98) and no lines are available in that group. Extension ___ is busy. For callback, press 2 or the callback key. You place an Intercom call to a busy extension Your call cannot go through. Please call the operator. You place a call that is blocked by your extension’s Toll Restriction Please do not disturb. You call an extension in Do Not Disturb. Please hold on. Your call is being rerouted. Call Forwarding Off Premise is rerouting your call to the programmed destination. A mailbox user can turn the volume up or down while listening to their messages. 138 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Product Description DSX Product Description Specifications and Parts ◆ 139 Specifications and Parts Specifications and Parts Specifications Specifications System Capacities (Page 1 of 2) Cabinets: 1 Talk Timeslots (Intercom/line): Non-blocking Ports 160 Lines: 64 Digital Telephones: DSX-80: 32 DSX-160: 96 Analog Telephones: DSX-80: 48 DSX-160: 80 DSS Consoles: 4 max. per system Plugs into a digital station port Power Failure Telephones: 2 per COIU Card Internal Paging Zones: 8 (7 and All Call) External Page Audio Output: 1 (on CPU) Music Inputs: 2 (on CPU) Conference Circuits: 32 Conference circuits dynamically allocated, with 8 parties max per Conference. Conference circuits provided on CPU. Specifications 140 ◆ Specifications and Parts DSX Product Description 16ESIU Digital Station Card 16SLIU Analog Station Card 8SLIU Analog Station Card 16COIU Analog CO Line Card 8COIU Analog CO Line Card T1/E1/PRI Card Refer to System Configuration (page 19) for capacities. CPU Card: 1 Environmental Requirements Meeting established environmental standards maximizes the life of the system. Refer to the Standard Practices Manual for further information. Be sure that the site is not: 1. In direct sunlight or in hot, cold or humid places. 2. In dusty areas or in areas where sulfuric gases are produced. 3. In places where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong. 4. In places where water or other fluids come in contact with the main equipment. 5. In areas near high-frequency machines or electric welders. 6. Near computers, telexes, microwaves, air conditioners, etc. 7. Near radio antennas (including shortwave). Power Requirements A dedicated 110 VAC 60 Hz circuit located within 7 feet of the cabinet is required. Environmental Specifications Cabinet and Key Telephones Temperature: Humidity: 0-40oC (32-104oF) 10-95% (non-condensing) Electrical Specifications The following specifications apply to each power supply installed. Power Supply: Output Power: 120 VAC + 10% @ 50-60 Hz 91 Watts @ 100% full load Input Current: VA: 1.5A @ 110V 165 VA Kwh: BTU: Grounding Requirements: .165 KwH 563 BU 12 AWG copper wire System Capacities (Page 2 of 2) Specifications DSX Product Description Specifications and Parts ◆ 141 Specifications and Parts Telephone and Line Voltages Keyset Voltages DC voltage measured at the MDF (between tip and ring) Minimum: 36 VDC Maximum: 44 VDC Minimum operating DC voltage measured at station jack (between tip and ring) 24 VDC 8/16SLIU Card Single Line Telephone Voltages DC voltage measured at the MDF (between tip and ring) On-Hook Idle State Minimum: 44 VDC On-Hook Idle State Maximum: 56 VDC Off-Hook Active State: 7.5 VDC typical, depending on the telephone type and loop length. Ringing voltage 50-65 VAC, sinusoidal (sine wave) High Voltage Message Waiting 95 VDC REN (Ringer Equivalence) Per Port 2 Simultaneous Ringing Ringing cycles through the ports, ringing four ports at a time. Line Voltages Ringing voltage 42-103 VAC @ 20 Hz Battery (from telco) 44-56 VDC External Paging Output Impedance: 600 Ohm Output Level: 0 dBr @ 1.0 KHz Specifications 142 ◆ Specifications and Parts DSX Product Description Mechanical Specifications Equipment Width Depth Height Weight 4 Slot KSU: 8 Slot KSU 10 3/4” 19 1/2” 5 7/8” 5 7/8” 13 11/16” 13 11/16” 4 lbs 5 oz 6 lbs 12 oz Display Keyset: 7 5/8” 9 1/2” 4 3/4” 2 lb. 5.7 oz. Super Display Keyset: 7 5/8” 9 1/2” 4 3/4” 2 lb. 5.7 oz. 60-Button DSS Console 5 5/8” 9 1/2” 4 3/4” 1 lb. 3.4 oz. BGM/MOH Music Source Inputs Music inputs are located on the CPU Card. Input Impedance: 10K Ohms Input Level: +18 dBr (+ 2 dBr) @ 1.0 Khz USB and Ethernet Specifications USB and ethernet connectors are located on the CPU Card. USB: USB 2.0 full speed (12 Mbits/sec) Ethernet Auto Sensing 2PGDAD Module Specifications Relay Contacts Configuration: Normally open Maximum Contact Ratings: 500 mA @ 24 VDC 250 mA @ 120 VAC Specifications DSX Product Description Specifications and Parts ◆ 143 Specifications and Parts FCC Registration Information Model: DX7NA-80M and DSX7NA-160M Manufacturer: NEC Infrontia FCC Part 15 Registration: Class A FCC Registration Number: US:NIFKF00BDSX US:NIFMF00BDSX US:NIFPF00BDSX Industry Canada Certificate (DOC) Number: IC: 140k-DSX Reg. Status FIC Mfrs. Port ID REN Network Jacks Original 02LS2 1091005 1091009 REN 0.6B RJ11C RJ21X T1/E1/PRI Card FCC Registration Information FIC Description 04DU9-BN 1.544 Mbps Superframe format (SF) without line power 04DU9-ISN 1.544 Mbps ANSI ESF and B8ZS without line power Cabling Requirements 1. Do not run station cable parallel with the AC source, telex or computer, etc. If the cables are near cable runs to those devices, use shielded cable with grounded shields or install the cable in conduit. 2. When cables must be run on the floor, use cable protectors. 3. Cable runs for key telephones and single line telephones Modules must be a dedicated, isolated cable pair. Device Cable Type Cable Run (ft) Notes Key Telephone 2-wire 26 AWG 2-wire 24 AWG 1300 2000 Single Line Telephone 2-wire 26 AWG 2-wire 24 AWG 2-wire 22 AWG 11,500 3150 18,000 5050 29,000 8000 at constant 20 mA at constant 35 mA at constant 20 mA at constant 35 mA at constant 20 mA at constant 35 mA 2PGDAD Module 2-wire 26 AWG 2-wire 24 AWG 2-wire 22 AWG 650 980 1640 DSX Analog Door Box to 2PGDAD Module 2-wire 26 AWG 2-wire 24 AWG 2-wire 22 AWG 650 980 1640 Parts List 144 ◆ Specifications and Parts DSX Product Description Parts List Station Equipment Description Part Number 22-Button Display Telephone with Speakerphone 1090020 (Black) 1090025 (White) 34-Button Backlit Display Telephone with Speakerphone 1090021 (Black) 1090026 (White) 34-Button Backlit Display Telephone with Full-Duplex Speakerphone 1090022 (Black) 1090027 (White) 34-Button Backlit Super Display Telephone with Half-Duplex Speakerphone 1090030 (Black) 1090031 (White) 60-Button DSS Console 1090024 (Black) 1090029 (White) DTH-1-1 Single Line Telephone 780034 DTR-1-1 Single Line Telephone 780020 (Black) 780021 (White) DTR-1HM-1 Single Line Telephone 780025 (Black) 780026 (White) Analog Door Box 922450 2PGDAD Module 0891027 DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone Description Part Number Cordless Lite II Telephone 730087 Cordless Lite II Base Unit AC Adaptor 730618 Cordless Lite II Base Unit Wall Mount Bracket 730608 Cordless Lite II Handset Charger 730632 Cordless Lite II Handset Charger AC Adaptor 730619 Cordless Lite II Wall Mount Bracket for Handset Charger 730633 Cordless Lite II Handset Battery 730631 Cordless Lite II Belt Clip 730634 Cordless Lite II M175 Headset 750637 Cordless Lite II MX150 Headset 750642 Parts List DSX Product Description Specifications and Parts ◆ 145 Specifications and Parts DESI Labels Description Part Number DSX Telephone Labels DSX 22-Button Display Telephone (White) 1093086 DSX 22-Button Display Telephone (Black) 1093085 DSX 34-Button Display Telephone (White) 1093084 DSX 34-Button Display Telephone (Black) 1093083 DSX 34-Button Super Display Telephone (White) 1093082 DSX 34-Button Super Display Telephone (Black) 1093081 DSX 60-Button DSS (White) 1093080 DSX 60-Button DSS (Black) 1093079 DTR-1-1 Telephone Labels Black 780400 Metallic Green 780401 Metallic Silver 780402 Lime Green 780403 Preprint (blank) 780459 DTR-1HM-1 Telephone Labels Black 780404 Metallic Green 780405 Metallic Silver 780406 Lime Green 780407 Preprint (blank) 780460 DTH-1-1 Telephone Labels Metallic Silver 780450 DSX Telephone Headsets Description Part Number See Headsets (page 5). Parts List 146 ◆ Specifications and Parts DSX Product Description Common Equipment Description Part Number DSX-80 4-Slot KSU DSX-160 8-Slot KSU 1090002 1090003 DSX Power Supply 1091008 Installation Cable 808920 DSX Serial Adaptor (requires customer-provided 6-conductor line cord) 1091014 Cards Description Part Number CPU Card 1090010 16 Port Digital Station Card (16ESIU) 1091004 16 Port Analog Station Card with HV Message Waiting (16SLIU) 1091007 8 Port Analog Station Card with HV Message Waiting (8SLIU) 1091010 T1/E1/PRI Line Card 1091006 16 Port CO Line Card (16COIU) 1091005 8 Port CO Line Card (16COIU) 1091009 IntraMail Description Part Number IntraMail 8 Port x 16 Hour 1091013 IntraMail 4 Port x 8 Hour 1091011 Parts List DSX Product Description Specifications and Parts ◆ 147 Specifications and Parts Replacement Parts Description Part Number Handset and Cord Assembly 1091016 22 Button Clear Plastic Cover 1091018 34 Button Clear Plastic Cover 1091019 34 Button Super Display Clear Plastic Cover 1091020 60 Button DSS Clear Plastic Cover 1091021 RFI Bead Kit 88901 Replacement Battery for CPU Card EX0254-0040 Parts List 148 ◆ Specifications and Parts DSX Product Description